Disposable article

(57)

A disposable article comprising a laminate web comprising a first outer extensible web (20) having a first elongation at break, a second outer extensible web (40) having a second elongation at break, attached to a first extensible web (20) at joints (50); a third sheet material (30) disposed between the first extensible strip (20) and the second extensible strip (40), which has a third elongation at break greater than both said elongation at break, and finally a utility component adjacent to the belt and preferably located therein. The belt is provided with openings at the joints (52) of the joints (50). During production, it passes between machine working rolls (not shown) in a direction perpendicular to the direction (CD) in which the shown cross-section of the belt is made. Another embodiment consists of a laminated apertured strip comprising a first extensible strip (20) and a second extensible strip (40) interconnected at discrete joint locations (50) and a third strip material (30) with greater extensibility than the first and second extensible strips. a second layer (41) disposed between the first extensible strip (20) and the second extensible strip (40), and a further utility component adjacent the layered strip, wherein the first extensible strip (20) and the second extensible strip (40) are in fluid communication with the third web material (30) through apertures and have different regions differentiated by at least one property selected from the group consisting of basis weight, fiber orientation, thickness and density .

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0001.tif" />

A single-use product having a laminate web having a slit area of ​​the art

The invention relates to a disposable article having a multi-layered laminate web with slotted openings and a utility component.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Disposable articles having laminate webs formed by bonding the individual webs by laminating are well known for various applications. For example, laminate, nonwoven webs are often used in disposable absorbent articles, such as diapers, adult incontinence products, cleaning products, polishing articles, etc. Nonwoven fabrics and nonwoven laminates are also used to impart additional bulk or softness to the web component. Similarly, foil or foil laminate strips can provide advantages by combining the parameters of the various foils that they stack together. Laminate strips can also be called composite strips.

Less common examples of laminate strips include laminates of mutually different materials. The materials may be different from each other in terms of mechanical tensile properties, thermal properties, or visual or tactile properties. For example, the nonwoven web may be attached to a relatively solid fabric to provide a soft feel to the fabric surface. Different materials can be joined by fusion bonding, gluing, ultrasonic bonding and the like. Bonding methods are often determined by the materials themselves, but often require bonding by gluing. For example, a laminate or composite of materials having widely differing melt properties may require an adhesive layer between the laminate layers. Even materials having similar melt properties to nonwoven and thermoplastic film materials are often bonded by the adhesive for proper bonding to prevent unwanted breakdown. Such manufacturing processes can be expensive due to the addition of adhesive, and the resulting laminate is often relatively stiff, depending on the amount in which the adhesive is added.

Slotted apertured laminate strips can be made by methods known in the art. One preferred method of forming slotted holes in a nonwoven web is described in U.S. Patent 5,916,661. Described herein is a laminate material having, for example, at least one layer by drawing spun fibers bonded to a nonwoven web bonded to at least one layer of a spunbonded gas stream bonded to a nonwoven web, carded nonwoven web or other suitable material. Such slit-shaped strips may be used as the topsheet for a disposable absorbent article. However, this document does not disclose slit laminate strips of completely different materials, e.g. materials of different material classes or having different material properties.

As noted, nonwoven webs are preferred as components of disposable absorbent articles such as diapers, incontinence briefs, gym shorts, feminine hygiene garments and the like, as well as personal cleansing products such as disposable wet handkerchiefs. or substantially dry tissues. Non-woven materials are also preferred components in other products such as disposable garments, surgical products such as drapes, surgical gowns, etc., durable garments, automotive components, car and upholstery furniture products, filter media, care products. household polishes, eg polishing cloths, dusters etc. and other consumer or commercial goods. The nonwoven materials used in these and other applications benefit from their diverse visual and tactile properties. However, when used alone, monolayer nonwoven materials are limited in the range of advantageous properties, including visual, contact, strength, or absorbent properties, by limiting known manufacturing methods, particularly as compared to woven or knitted materials.

Therefore, it would be desirable to have a disposable article comprising a laminate web composed of webs with different material properties.

It would also be desirable to have a disposable article having a laminate web formed by joining layers without adhesive.

Further, it would be desirable to have a disposable article having a slit-like laminate strip having visually distinct areas giving a fabric or knitted look and feel.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

These deficiencies are largely eliminated by a disposable product having a

(a) a laminated strip with slotted apertures, containing:

1) a first extensible strip having a first elongation at break;

2) a second extensible strip attached to the first extensible strip at the joining points, having a second extension at

-interruption, and

3) a third sheet material that is disposed between the first and second sheets, the third sheet material having a third elongation at break that is greater than both the first and second elongation at break;

b) a utility component disposed adjacent to the laminate strip.

In another embodiment, a slit-apertured laminate web having a first expanding web and a second expanding web are joined together at spaced apart bonding locations and a third material positioned between the first nonwoven web and the second nonwoven web. The first nonwoven web, the second nonwoven web, and the third nonwoven web are fluid interconnected through slotted apertures and have distinct areas that are distinguished from one another by at least one of the properties selected from the group consisting of basis weight, fiber orientation, thickness, and density.

Overview of the drawings

The invention will be explained in more detail by means of the following drawings having connection with this description, wherein like parts have like reference numerals.

Giant. 1 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a laminate web in accordance with the present invention.

Giant. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the laminate strip of FIG. 1.

Giant. 3 is an enlarged detail view of one bonding point of the laminate strip of the present invention.

Giant. 4 is a plan view of another embodiment of the laminate strip of the present invention.

Giant. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the laminate strip shown in FIG. 4.

Giant. 6 is a plan view of another embodiment of the laminate strip of the present invention.

Giant. 7 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the laminate strip shown in FIG. 6.

Giant. 8 is a photomicrograph of one embodiment of the laminate strip of the present invention.

Giant. 9 is a schematic illustration of a method of manufacturing a laminate strip according to the present invention.

Giant. 10 is a perspective view of a melt-linking calendering apparatus.

Giant. 11 is a schematic representation of a pattern of protrusions on a calender roll.

Giant. 12 is a perspective view of the laminate extraction apparatus of the present invention to create apertures therein.

Giant. 13 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the interlocking portions of the apparatus shown in FIG. 12.

• ·

9 99

Giant. 14 is a perspective view of an alternative laminate withdrawal apparatus of the present invention in a cross-machine direction to create apertures therein.

Giant. 15 is a perspective view of another alternative laminate extraction apparatus of the present invention in the machine direction to create apertures therein.

Giant. 16 is a perspective view of the laminate extraction apparatus of the present invention both transversely and along the machine to create apertures therein.

Giant. 17 is a perspective view of a disposable absorbent article having components that can be made of the laminate sheet material of the present invention.

• · • · • ♦ · · · ·

Detailed description of the invention:

As used herein the term absorbent article means articles that absorb and contain liquids (ie, water, detergents, conditioners, polishes, body exudates). In some cases, does this mean products that are placed? against or near the body apertures of the wearer to absorb and contain various exudates excreted by the body. In other cases, the term means articles which have the ability to absorb and retain the substance until the product is used by the consumer for its intended purpose.

The term "disposable" is used herein to describe articles of the present invention that are not intended to be laundered or otherwise restored or used for a long period of time, i.e. it is primarily intended to be discarded after 25 uses, more preferably after 10 uses, more preferably after 5 uses, and most preferably after a single use. Preferably, such disposable products are recycled, composted or otherwise disposed of in an environmentally acceptable manner. One unit forming a disposable product refers to disposable products that are formed from separate parts joined together so as to form a coordinated unit so as not to require special handling parts such as a separate holder and insert.

The term nonwoven web as used herein refers to a web having the structure of individual fibers or yarns interleaved with one another, but not in some regular, repetitive manner. Nonwoven webs have in the past been produced in a number of ways, such as meltblown spinning methods into a gas stream, methods for drawing fiber from a nozzle and bonding to a nonwoven web, and methods of forming a bonded carded web.

As used herein, the term microfiber means small diameter fibers having a mean diameter of no greater than about 100 µm (microns).

As used herein, the term meltblown fibers means fibers formed by extruding molten thermoplastic material through a group of fine usually circular capillaries in the spinneret as molten fibers or into a gas stream moving at high velocity, e.g. thinens the fibers of the molten thermoplastic material to reduce their diameter until they have a microfiber diameter. Thereafter, the fibers so produced are entrained by a gas stream moving at high speed and deposited on the collecting surface where they form a web of randomly dispersed fibers.

As used herein, the term spunbonded fibers means small diameter fibers that are formed by extruding a melt of thermoplastic material as fibers from a group of fine, usually circular, capillary spinnerets, with the diameter of the extruded fibers being rapidly reduced thereafter. dragging.

As used herein, the term polymer generally includes, but is not limited to, homopolymers, copolymers such as block, graft, random and alternative copolymers, terpolymers, etc., and mixtures and modifications thereof. Further, unless otherwise specifically limited, the term polymer will include all possible geometrical configurations of the material. Such arrangements include, but are not limited to, isotactic, syndiotactic, and statistical symmetry.

• 4» • » ♦ * • · · • · · ·· • · · ♦· 9 9 ·· • · · · «··· • · 99 · · · • 9

9999

As used herein, the term "elastic" refers to a material that can be pulled out, i.e. elongated by at least 60%, i.e., to a stretched stretch length that is at least 160% of the relaxed unstretched length, and that returns from at least 55% of its elongation after release of the tension elongation force. A hypothetical example would be a sample of 25.4 mm (1) long material that can be extended to at least 40.64 mm (1.60) and which returns to 40.64 mm (1.60) after release and returns to a length of not more than 32,26 mm (1,27). Many elastic materials can be extended by more than 60%, ie. much more than 160% of their unstretched length, for example, to extend by 100% or more, and many of these materials return substantially to their initial unstretched length, for example, to 105% of the initial unstretched length after release of the pulling force.

As used herein, the term inelastic means a material that does not fall within the definition of the above elastic material.

As used herein, the term extensible refers to a material that can be extended by at least 50% after application of the extensible force without devastating failure.

The products according to the invention comprise the following basic parts: laminate strip, utility component and optional other components.

Laminate belt:

The laminate web 10 of the article of the present invention has at least three layers, strips or diapers disposed in a layer relative to the forehead as shown in Figure 1. The layers should be thin enough to be processed as is. as described herein, but are not limited to any thickness (i.e., total thickness)

4 thickness). The first outer layer 20 and the second outer layer 40 are known as a first extensible strip having a first elongation at break and a second extensible strip having a second elongation at break. Preferably, the second outer layer comprises the same material as the first outer layer, but may be of a different material. At least one third, central layer 30 is disposed between the two outer layers. The laminate web 10 is heat calendered as described below to provide a plurality of fusion bonding sites 50 that serve to join the layers 20, 30 and 40 to form a single web forming the web. Although the laminate web 10 is primarily described in connection with nonwoven webs and composites, in principle, the laminate web 10 may be made of any web material that meets the requirements, ie, melt properties, extensibility, as described herein. The layers may be films, microporous films, apertured films, and the like.

Preferably, the first and second outer layers are nonwoven. Suitable nonwoven materials for the first and second outer layers include, but are not limited to, cellulosic materials, sponge-like materials (both natural and synthetic, woven films, webs, and combinations thereof). Consisting of cellulosic nonwoven materials, woven sheets, webs, foams, sponges, reticular foams, vacuum formed laminates, scrims and combinations thereof.

The first and second layers may comprise a variety of both natural and synthetic fibers or materials. As used herein, the word natural means that these are materials of plant, animal or insect origin or are by-products of plants, animals or insects. A conventional starting material is usually a web of fibers containing any conventional synthetic or natural fibers of textile length, or a combination of the foregoing. Page 3 of 3 výchozí · výchozí · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

Non-limiting examples of natural materials that can be used in the laminate web layers include, but are not limited to, silk fibers, keratin fibers and cellulose fibers. Non-limiting examples of keratin fibers include those selected from the group consisting of wool fibers, camel hair and the like. Non-limiting examples of cellulosic fibers include those selected from the group consisting of wood pulp fibers, cotton fibers, hemp fibers, jute fibers, flax fibers, and combinations thereof. Cellulose fiber materials are preferred in the present invention.

Non-limiting examples of synthetic materials applicable to laminate web layers include those selected from the group consisting of acetate fibers, acrylic fibers, cellulose ester fibers, modacrylic fibers, polyamide fibers, polyester fibers, polyolefin fibers, polyvinyl alcohol fibers, rajon fibers, polyethylene foams polyurethane foams and combinations thereof. Examples of suitable synthetic fiber materials include acrylates such as acrylate, creslane and acrylonitrile based fibers, orion, cellulose ester fibers such as cellulose acetate, arnel and acel, polyamides such as nylons, e.g. nylon 6, nylon 66, nylon 610 and the like, polyesters such as fortrel, codel and polyethylene terephthalate fiber, polybutylene terephthalate fiber, dacron, polyolefin fibers such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyvinyl acetate fibers, polyuethane foams, and combinations thereof. These and other suitable fibers and nonwoven materials prepared therefrom are generally described in &amp; lt; RTI ID = 0.0 &amp; gt; &amp; lt; / RTI &amp; gt; • 9 9 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

9 99 99 · 9 · 9999 publications Riedel: Nonwoven Bonding Methods and Materials, Nonwoven World (1987); The American Encyclopedia, vol. 11, cf. 147-153 and Volume 26, pp. 566-581 (1984) and U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,891,227 and 4,891,228.

Non-woven materials of natural materials consist of strips or sheets most commonly formed on a fine wire screen of a liquid fiber suspension, see CA Hampel et al., Encyclopedia of Chemistry, Third Edition, 1973, pp. 793-795 (1973). ; The American Encyclopedia, Volume 21, pp. 376-383; GA Smook, Handbook of Pulp and Paper Technologies, Technical Association for Pulp and Paper Industry (1986).

The nonwoven products of natural materials that can be used in the laminate web of the present invention can be obtained from a wide variety of commercial sources. Non-limiting examples of suitable commercially available paper layers which may be used herein include Airtex®, an embossed, airlaid cellulosic layer having a basis weight of about 85 g / m 2.² (71 gsy), available from James River, Green Bay, Wl, USA and Walkisoft®, an embossed airlaid cellulosic layer having a basis weight of 89.7 g / m 2² (75 gsy), available from Walkisoft USA, Mount Holly, NC, USA.

Other suitable nonwoven materials include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat.

<td>US</td><td> 5</td><td> 085</td><td> 736,</td><td>US 5</td><td> 138</td>

<td>US</td><td> 4</td><td> 637</td><td> 859,</td><td>US 4</td><td> 529</td>

<td>US</td><td> 5</td><td> 67 9</td><td> 222,</td><td>US 5,628</td><td> 097</td>

447 294, US 4,603,176, 002, US 5,262,007,

480, US 4,687,153, US 5,916,661 and US 5,658

US 4,981,557, US 5,264,082,

U.S. 5,223,096

639 • · · ««· · · ··· · ··♦· ···· « · « • ··« • ··

Methods for making nonwoven materials are well known in the art. Generally, these nonwoven materials can be made by air laying, water laying, melt pulping in an air stream, coforming, spinning nonwoven fibers, or carding, wherein the fibers or filaments are first cut to desired lengths from long strands that enter the water or air stream. and then deposited on a screen through which air or water-laying fibers pass. The resulting layer, irrespective of its method of manufacture or composition, is then subjected to at least one or more types of bonding operations to anchor the individual fibers to form a self-supporting web. In accordance with the present invention, layers comprising nonwoven materials can be prepared by a variety of processing methods including, but not limited to, air entanglement, hydroentangling, thermal bonding, and combinations thereof.

The more extensible third core layer may also be nonwoven as described above, but the core layer 30 itself does not need to be thermally compatible with the outer layers. The core layer 30 need not be melt processable either. It can be, for example, a cellulosic material such as paper, soft paper, paper towels, paper napkins, woven or knitted material such as cotton or rayon blends or a thermosetting material such as a polyester or aromatic polyamide foil. The core layer 30 may be another nonwoven material having suitable properties for processing into an apertured layer. When the core layer 30 has a melting point, this temperature is preferably at least about 20 ° C higher than the temperature of the outer layers. However, the core layer 30 may not have a melting point and may simply become softened at the calendering temperatures required to bond the laminate.

• · 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 » 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

99 99 99 99 9999 • · ·«

One of the unexpected advantages of the present invention is the discovery that the novel properties of the belt can be given by the choice of a central layer 30 located between the two outer layers. The core layer material is preferably selected from the group consisting of thermoplastic webs, polymeric films, elastic sponges, molded films, and combinations thereof. However, it is important that the middle layer has a third elongation at break that is greater than that of the first outer layer 20 and the second outer layer 40. The wide range of possible core layer materials 30 allows a surprising variety of structures according to the present invention, each having a preferred use in a wide variety of end uses.

Suitable materials for the core layer 30 are elastomeric polymeric films such as microscopically expanded, vacuum-shaped, three-dimensionally shaped films described in US 08/816 106. The core layer may further be a three-dimensionally shaped film having micro-holes as described in the patents US 4,629,643 and US 4,609,518.

The central layer 30 may be a web material having a stretchable web as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,518,801. Such a web may be a Structural Elastic-Like Film (abbreviated to SELF) formed, for example, by embossing matt plates, or cylinders.

The central layer 30 may be a web of absorbent foam with an open cell. Particularly suitable absorbent foams for high performance absorbent articles, such as diapers, are those made from High Internal Phase Emulsions (abbreviated to HIPE), see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,260,345 and 5,268,224. HIPE foams provide desirable handling properties * 44

4 4 44

44 444 44 444 4 4 *444 4444 4 4 4

44 44 44 4 «4444 fluids, including

(a) relatively good wick suction and fluid distribution parameters for transporting aspirated urine or other bodily fluid away from the initial contact zone and other areas of the foam structure to allow subsequent fluid outflows to be received; and

b) a relatively high storage capacity with a relatively high fluid capacity under load, i.e. under compressive forces.

Further, since the laminate web 10 is formed without the use of thermoplastic adhesives, durable properties can be obtained as with a garment. Such laminates can be washed several times before unacceptable wear occurs.

As shown in FIG. 2, the center layer 30 is selected such that when the layers of the laminate web 10 are processed as shown below, portions of the center layer 10 in the region of the fusion joints 50 are separated. thus allowing the first outer layer 20 by melting to bond directly to the second outer layer 40 at the interface 52 of both materials at the fusion bonding points, 50. Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that the method of the present invention facilitates such separation of the core layer 30 by melting, shearing, cutting or otherwise breaking the core layer 30 and sufficiently deflecting the material off the core layer 30 to allow thermal joining two outer layers.

Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that in order to bond the layers of the laminate strip so as to subsequently form holes therein, the thermal bonding should be formed by calendering with the thermal tips described below. ··

9 4 44

4444 sites having a narrow W width and a high aspect ratio. For example, Fig. 3 shows the melting region of one melting joint 50 having a narrow width width W and a large aspect ratio, i.e. the length L is substantially greater than the width W. The length L should be selected so as to allow for a proper joint area, while the width W is narrow enough to allow the projection that is used to form the joint (as described below) to cut, punch or otherwise pierce a central layer 30 in the region of the joints as described below. The width W may be in the range of 0.0762 to 0.508 mm (0.003 to 0.020), but in a particularly preferred embodiment it is in the range of 0.127 to 0.254 mm (0.005 to 0.010) and may be adjusted depending on the properties of the core layer 30. In the embodiment, only the layer (s) 30 is punched such that the central layer is punched after joining, while the outer layers are in a bonded unpunched state. However, for some end use requirements, it may be desirable that the protrusions used to form the joining sites cut, punch, pierce or otherwise shape the apertures through the layers 20, 30, 40 at some or all of the joining sites.

It is believed that the aspect ratio can be as low as 3 (ie, the L / W ratio is equal to 3/1). It may also be between 4 and 20. In one preferred embodiment, the aspect ratio was about 10. The aspect ratio of the fusion bonding points 50 is limited only by the corresponding aspect ratio of the points connecting the projections of the calender roll or rolls as described in detail below.

In a preferred embodiment, the longitudinal axis of each connection point I, which corresponds to the directional length dimension of the connection point 50, is located in a regular, repeating pattern oriented generally in the machine direction, MD, as shown in Figure 1.

·« 99 «1 99 .&gt;· ·*· 9 9 9 · 9·9·

9 999 9 »99 9 A •« 9 999 99 9 · 9 · 9 9 9 · 9 9999 99 »• 9 99 99 9 A« 99 »·

However, the connection points may be located in a regular repeating pattern oriented in a cross machine direction or randomly oriented in a cross machine direction and along the machine. For example, the joints 50 may be located in a herringbone pattern.

A further advantage of the present invention is obtained when the heat bonded laminate web described above is stretched or elongated in a direction generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 1 of the fusion bonding points 50. The fusion bonding at the fusion bonding points 50 tends to create local weakened areas of the band at bonding points. As the sites of the strip 10 extend in a direction generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis I of the joining sites 50, the material in the joining site will not withstand stress and a slotted opening will be formed. The relatively large aspect ratio of the melting joints 50 makes it possible to create a relatively large slit-shaped opening after sufficient stretching. When the laminate web 10 is evenly stretched, the result is a regular pattern of a plurality of slotted apertures 60 that corresponds to the pattern of the fusion bonding locations 50.

Giant. 4 shows a fragmentary sectional view of a slit-shaped laminate strip according to the present invention. As can be seen, the partial cross-sectional representation makes it possible to show each layer or diaper in plan view. The laminate strip 10 shown in FIG. 4 is produced after the thermally bonded laminate has been pulled out in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the melting joints 50, in this case across the machine CD. As shown, where the fusion bonding points 50 were previously, slit-shaped openings 60 are formed because relatively weak bonding points 50 do not withstand stress. It is also shown that the central layer 30 can remain substantially evenly distributed in the laminate 10 depending on the material properties of the central layer.

4 4 4 * 4 4 4 • 4 4 4

4

44 »4 4 « 4 · 4 • 4 44

4 4

4 If the center layer 30 is more extensible than the first outer layer 20 or the second outer layer 40, then it simply expands, possibly by plastic deformation, but remains generally uniformly distributed in the non-perforated areas of the belt 10. For example, when utilizing the thermoplastic film as the central layer 30, extends either extensibly or elastically (depending on the type of film), but may remain generally uniform, for example in terms of density or basis weight.

When the slits 60 are formed, the thermally bonded portions of the layers 20, and 40 remain primarily on portions of the circumferences of the slotted openings corresponding to the length dimension of the joining points 50. Therefore, each of the slotted openings 60 does not have a circumference of thermally bonded material. 4. One advantageous feature of such a laminate strip is that once the slit holes have been made therein, fluid communication in the middle layer is facilitated. Thus, the absorbent layer 30 may be used between relatively non-absorbent outer layers and the laminate could be an absorbent cloth with a relatively dry-to-dry outer surface.

Giant. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of what is shown in FIG. 4. As can be seen, slit-like openings 60 are formed when the laminate web is pulled out in the T direction.

In some particularly preferred embodiments, the laminate web has from 10% to 20% of the surface area as an open area. As used herein, the term "open area" means that the web has slotted openings or includes openings such that the amount of material needed to cover a certain region is minimized due to the expansion of the web that occurs after pulling out, by curling into a circle. More preferably, the open area of ​​the web is from 11% to 17%.

• 4 4 • 4 444

4 4 4

4 4 4 *4 44 »· 44 «4 44 »44 4 4 44 «

4 44 4 4 4

44 444 4 4

4 4 4 4 ·4 ·«* -44 ·4 444«

A surprising advantage of the laminate web structure shown in FIG. 6 is the presence of separate areas in the non-perforated portion of the web, distinguished by at least one property selected from the group consisting of basis weight, thickness, density, and combinations thereof. As can be seen from the section in FIG. 7, several such areas can be distinguished. In a particularly preferred embodiment, they are regions^-Visually different and give the laminate strip an aesthetically pleasing appearance and feel which is particularly useful in the products of the present invention. The regions may also give the laminate a texture as if it were a garment or knit.

As can be seen from FIG. 7, several structurally different regions can be distinguished in the section shown. The region indicated by 64 corresponds to the slit 60. In the non-apertured belt region, the region 66 is a relatively high basis weight region comprising a central layer 30. The region 68 represents the portion of the laminate strip in which the central layer 30 has ruptured and separated. present, creating an area with a relatively low basis weight of the web 10. In general, regions of higher basis weight will also be regions of correspondingly higher density, but need not be. For example, a post-stretch embossing method may be applied to the web 10 to form multi-density regions in addition to multi-basis weight regions. For high basis weight or high density areas, differences can often be discernible by simply swiping between fingers.

Generally, a laminate web 10 having generally parallel rows of melt bonding points 50 extending in the machine direction MD that accordingly form generally parallel rows of slit-shaped apertures 60 when they are pulled out and having a central layer 30 with lower elongation at break than outer layers 20, 40 , the resulting drawn, apertured laminate web 10 has a generally low basis weight, low density regions between the slot-like openings 60 in the machine direction MD, e.g., the region 68 of Figures 6 and 7. Similarly, the laminate web 10 has a relatively high basis weight, regions of high density between adjacent rows of apertures 60 in the cross-machine direction of the CD, e.g., region 66 in Figure 7. the embossing can be varied similarly to the thickness of the laminate strip, the thicker regions generally corresponding to the higher density regions.

Another embodiment of the laminate web 10 usable in the present invention that uses nonwoven webs as the outer layer has distinct areas differentiated by fiber orientation. Different fiber orientation can be achieved by providing localized areas in the web 10 that are subjected to greater pulling than other areas. For example, by tensioning the web 10 more extensively in the regions corresponding to the regions 68 in FIG. 6, regions with significant fiber reorientation are formed. Such local tension can be produced by the method of the present invention as detailed below.

Giant. 8 is a photomicrograph showing in enlarged detail the web of the present invention which has been stretched to form holes and locally stretched to form fiber reorientation areas 68. As can be seen in FIG. 8, by locally pulling out portions of the belt more than elsewhere, the slits thus formed may have different sizes. The area generally referred to as 70 in FIG. 8 has undergone greater tension, i.e., local pull, than the area designated 72. Thus, the slit-shaped openings in the region 70 are larger than the slit-shaped openings in the region 72 and the basis weight of the nonwoven web material in the region 72 is less than the basis weight of the nonwoven web in the region 70. In addition to the difference in basis weight due to localized stress differences For example, the laminate web of the present invention may also have different fiber reorientation areas 68. In these areas, the fibers were reoriented from a general random orientation to a predominant orientation in the elongation direction.

In addition, more than one core layer 30 may be advantageously used. For example, a laminate strip having a core layer of polymeric film and a further core layer having a cellulosic soft material, both core layers positioned between the first nonwoven outer layer and the second nonwoven outer layer may an absorbent wiping product in which one side is relatively more absorbent than the other. When the central layer of the polymeric film is present, it may be a three-dimensional shaped film such that the side of the film can impart additional texture to the laminate, which is advantageous in many wiping applications. Macroscopically expanded, three-dimensionally shaped films suitable for use in the present invention include those described in U.S. Patents 3,929,135 and 4,342,314.

The core layer 30 may further comprise absorbent gelling materials. For example, superabsorbers or hydrogel materials can provide excellent absorbency when the laminate web of the present invention is used as an absorbent cloth or core in the disposable absorbent article of the present invention. As used herein, a hydrogel is an inorganic or organic compound capable of absorbing aqueous fluids and retaining them at moderate pressures. For good results, hydrogels should be insoluble in water. Examples are inorganic materials such as silica gels and organic compounds such as crosslinked

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0002.tif" />

polymers. The crosslinking can be induced by covalent, ionic, van de Waals or hydrogen bonds. Examples of such polymers are polyacrylamides, polyvinyl alcohol, copolymers of ethylene and maleic anhydride, polyvinyl ethers, hydroxypropylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, polyvinylpyridine and the like. Suitable gelling materials are described below as optional ingredients relating to the personal care products of the present invention. However, it will be understood that such gelling materials may also be utilized in each of the articles of the present invention, regardless of the intended use of the article.

The structure of the laminate web is particularly useful in the product package of the present invention since the web can be made of 2. different materials without the use of adhesive or bonding. The plurality of fusion bonding points 50 are sufficient to hold the webs together in the laminate web so that the laminate web behaves as a single web and retains integrity in processing and use without undesirable delamination. However, in some embodiments and in some materials, it may be advantageous to apply adhesive between at least two of the layers of which it is composed.

Method of production of laminate strip:

FIG. 9 schematically illustrates a method 100 for manufacturing a laminate web for the subject articles.

The first, relatively extensible web 120 unwinds from the first supply roll 104 and moves in the direction indicated by the arrows associated therewith. Similarly, the second, relatively extensible web 140 is unwound from the second storage roll 105. The center layer 130 is similarly unwound from the third storage roll 107. The three components or more, when more than one center layer is used, pass through the gap 106 of the device 108. a connecting roller with heat points, formed by rollers 110 and 112.

Any outer layer may comprise a shaped film, such as a three-dimensionally shaped film having micro-holes as described in U.S. Patents 4,629,643 and 4,609,518.

In a particularly preferred embodiment, the two outer layers comprise nonwoven^-and can be the same. The nonwoven material can be formed by known nonwoven extrusion methods, such as known methods for extruding a melt into a gas stream or known methods for withdrawing a fiberized fiber and passing directly through the gap 106 without first being bonded or deposited as storage rolls. In a preferred embodiment, however, the nonwoven webs are heat-merely bonded (consolidated) webs which are commercially obtainable as a roll of material.

The nonwoven webs of the outer layer (s) may be elastic or inelastic to the extent that the third central layer is more extensible than both the first and second outer layers. The nonwoven web may be any meltbonded web, including a nonwoven web of filament withdrawal, a nonwoven web of gas-spun fibers, or a bonded carded web. When the nonwoven web is a spunbonded fiber web, it may include meltblown microfibers. The nonwoven web may be made of fiber-forming polymers such as polyolefins. Examples of polyolefins include one or more of the following polymers: polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene copolymers, propylene copolymers, and butene copolymers. The nonwoven web may have a basis weight in the range of 10 to 60 g / m 2² and more preferably 15 to 30 g / m 2².

The nonwoven outer layers may be any multilayer material having, for example, at least one layer of a spunbonded web

9 Bonded to at least one layer of a meltblown web, a bonded carded web, or. other suitable material. For example, the nonwoven web may be a multilayer web having a first layer of spunbonded polypropylene having a basis weight of 6.8 g to 271.2 g / m 2² (0.2 to 8 ounces per square yard), and a second meltblown polypropylene layer having a basis weight of 6.8 g to 135.6 g / m 2² (0.2 to 4 ounces per square yard) and a second spunbonded polypropylene layer having a basis weight of 6.8 g to 271.2 g / m 2² (0.2 to 8 ounces per square yard). Alternatively, the nonwoven web may be a single layer of material, such as a spunbonded web having a basis weight of 6.8 g to 339, 1 g (from 0.2 to 10 ounces per square yard) or a meltblown web having a weight of 6.8 g to 271.2 g / m² (0.2 to 8 ounces per square yard).

The outer layers of the nonwoven web may also be a composite formed from a mixture of two or more different fibers or a mixture of fibers and particles. Such blends can be formed by adding fibers or particles to a gas stream in which fibers produced by spinning are entrained into the gas stream or spinning to form a thoroughly intertwined mixture of fibers and other materials such as wood pulp, staple fibers and particles prior to collection. fibers.

Prior to processing the laminate web as described herein, the outer fiber coverings of the respective layers may be bonded to form a coherent web structure. Suitable bonding methods include, but are not limited to, chemical bonding, ultrasonic bonding, thermal bonding such as point calendering, hydroentangling and needling.

• · ··

Referring to Figures 9 and 10, a roll bonding arrangement 108 for nonwoven materials is shown, which preferably comprises a patterned calender roll 110 and a smooth counter roll 112. One or both of the patterned calender rolls 110 and the smooth counter roll 112 may be heated, and the pressure between the two rolls may optionally be adjusted by well known means to provide the desired temperature and pressure ± ak to simultaneously deflect the center layer 30 at the fusion joints. two outer layers at the bonding points were fused together.

The patterned calender roll 110 is configured to have a circular cylindrical surface 114 and a plurality of protrusions or protruding protrusions 116 that extend outwardly. The projections 116 are spaced in a predetermined pattern, each projection 116 being arranged and positioned to deflect the central layer 30 at the fusion joints and fuse the two outer layers together in a plurality of locations. One pattern of the projections 116 is shown in FIG. 11. as can be seen, the protrusions 116 have a relatively small width WP, which may be between 0.0762 mm and 0.508 mm (0.003 and 0.020), but in a preferred embodiment it is about 0.254 mm (0- 010). The protrusions may have a length of LP in the range of 0.762 mm to 5.08 mm (0.030 to 0.200 "), preferably about 2.54 mm (0-, 100). In a preferred embodiment, the projections have an aspect ratio of 10. The pattern shown is a regular, repeating pattern of checkerboard spaced projections, generally in rows, each separated by a row spacing RS that is in the range of 0.254 mm to 5.08 mm (0.010 to 0.200). In a preferred embodiment, the row spacing RS is around 1.524 mm (0.060). The projections may be spaced apart in a row with a pitch, in a series PS, which is generally equal to, the length of the projection LP. However, the pitch and pattern may vary in any way depending on the desired end product.

·· ·· 99 • · · 9 &lt;

• * 999 9 9 99 99 &lt;

• ·· ··· ·« * « « « _t*··· · · · · 9 · « • · ·· ·· · · «· 99 9 9

As shown in FIG. 10, a patterned calender roll

110 may have a recurring pattern of protrusions 116 that extend around the entire periphery of the surface 114. Alternatively, the protrusions 116 may extend around a portion or portions of the periphery of the surface 114. Similarly, the protrusions 116 may be in a non-repeating pattern or a repeating pattern of randomly oriented protrusions.

The protrusions 116 are preferably truncated conical shapes that project radially outwardly from the surface 114 and which have rectangular or somewhat elliptical surfaces 117 at the distal end. While it is not intended to limit the scope of the present invention to the protrusions of this configuration only, it is currently believed that a high aspect ratio of the melting joint 50 can only be achieved if the protrusions also have a narrow width and large aspect ratio at the distal end surface 117. As shown above with reference to Fig. 11. Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is understood that other suitable shapes of the distal ends 117 may in particular be circular, square, rectangular, etc., to facilitate bonding and punching of the laminate web. The roller 110 preferably has a finish such that all end surfaces 117 lie in an imaginary truly circular cylinder that is coaxial with respect to the axis of rotation of the roller 110.

The height of the projections should be selected according to the thickness of the laminate to be joined. In general, the height dimension should be greater than the maximum thickness of the laminate strip during the calendering process, so that a proper bonding occurs at the bonding points and only at the bonding points.

The counter roller 112 is preferably a completely circular, smooth-surface steel cylinder. After passing through the gap 106, three strips or more of strips 120, 130, and 140 are formed into a laminate strip 10. V φ · φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ

At this point in the process, the outer layers are thermally bonded and have no openings therein as shown in Figures 1 and 2. The central layer or layers 30 of the belt 130 are perforated because they have been pushed away by the protrusions 116 in the gap 106.

The laminate web 10 can be further processed by creating slotted holes at all points projecting from the laminate web perpendicular to the axis I of the joint locations 50. It is in this manner that the open region of the web is formed. 9 and 10, the I axis is generally parallel to the machine direction MD of the web being processed. Hence the elongation in cross section of the CD to. the parts that are connected, cause. 50 will rupture and open to form slotted holes in the belt.

One way of forming slit-like openings on the belt is by passing the belt through a gap 130 formed by an incremental pulling system 132 that uses opposing pressure applicators 134, 136 having three-dimensional surfaces that are at least partially complementary to each other. Tensioning of the laminate web can be accomplished by other methods known in the art, including other tensioning or even hand-stretching, but to achieve a uniform level of tension throughout the web, and especially when they are. localized voltage differentials are desired. the incremental pull-out system 132 described herein.

FIG. 12 is a partial enlarged view of an incremental pulling system 132 that includes incremental pulling rollers 134 and 136. The incremental pulling roller 134 has a plurality of teeth 160 and corresponding grooves 161- that extend around the entire periphery of the roller 134.

The incremental take-up roller 136 includes teeth 162 and

9 9 9 · · ·· • 9 9

9

9 9

9 9

9 the teeth on the cylinder 134 fit into or are in position. in engagement with the grooves 163 on the roller 136, while the teeth 162 on the roller 136 engage or engage with the grooves 161 on the roller 134. The teeth of each roller are generally triangular in shape as shown in Figure 13. they may be slightly rounded if desired for some effects in the finished strip.

Giant. 13 shows a portion of the interlocking teeth 160 and 162 of rollers 134 and 134, respectively. 136. The term tooth pitch as used herein refers to the distance between the vertices of adjacent teeth. The pitch of the teeth may be 0.508 mm to 7.620 mm (0.02 to 0.30) and is preferably in the range of 1.25 mm to 0.50 mm. 3.81 mm (0.05 to 0.15). The tooth height or depth is measured from the tooth base to the tooth tip and is preferably the same for all teeth. The height of the teeth can. be in the range of 2.54 mm to 22.86 mm (0.10 to 0.90) and is preferably 6.35 mm to 12.7 mm (0-, 25 to 0.50)

The teeth 160 in one cylinder may be offset by half the pitch relative to the teeth 162 in the other cylinder such that the teeth of one cylinder, e.g., teeth 160-, fit into a depression, i.e., a depression 163-, between the teeth in the opposite cylinder. The offset allows the opposing rollers to engage when engaged or when they engage a working position with each other. In a preferred embodiment, the teeth of the respective rollers only partially engage one another. The degree to which the teeth on the opposing rollers fit together is referred to herein as Depth of Engagement (abbreviated DOE) as seen in Figure 13, DOE E being the distance between. the position given by the plane Pl₇ where are they. tooth tips on respective cylinders in the same plane (0% engagement) to the position indicated by plane P2, where the tooth tips of one cylinder extend inward beyond plane P1 into a depression on the opposite cylinder. The optimal or efficient DOE for a particular laminate strip depends on the height and ··· 94 44 4 #

4 9 4 4 9 4 • 9 449 9 9 44 • 44 4 · 4 44 4 • ·· · 4 44 9 ·· 49 4444 • 4 94

4 4 4

4 ·

4 9 • 44 «444 tooth pitch and belt materials.

In other embodiments, the teeth of the interlocking rollers need not be aligned to the depressions of the opposite cylinder, i.e., the teeth may be out of phase with the depressions to some extent, from a slight deflection to a large deflection.

As the laminate web 10 having the melt bonded sites 50 passes through the incremental pulling system 132, the laminate web 10 may be subjected to CD stretching across the machine, causing the laminate web 10 to stretch in the CD direction across the machine. Alternatively or additionally, the laminate web may be 1.0. tensioned in MD direction along the machine. The tensioning force exerted on the laminate web 10 can be adjusted, i. adjusting the DQE to cause the hot melt joints 50 to separate or rupture, thereby forming a plurality of slotted holes 60 that are at the hot melt joints 50 in the laminate strip 10. Portions of the hot melt joints of the laminate strip 10 but. they remain as shown by the portions 62 in FIG. 4, thereby keeping the nonwoven web in a coherent state even after the fusion bonding sites break. After being subjected to the tensioning force exerted by the incremental pulling system 132, the laminate web 10 has a plurality of slotted apertures 60 that coincide with the fusion bonding points 50 of the laminate web. As noted, a portion of the peripheral edges of the slotted apertures 60 includes remnants 62 of the melting joints 60. The remnants 60 are believed to help withstand further tearing or delamination of the laminate web.

Instead of two substantially identical rollers 134 and 136, one or both rollers may be configured to produce stretch and further patterning. For example, one or both of the rollers may be modified.

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0003.tif" />

such that they have a plurality of uniformly spaced thin, planar channels 24 6 on the surface of the roll, as shown in roller 236 in Fig. 14, in the teeth. Fig. 14 is an enlarged view of an alternative incremental pulling system 232 including incremental withdrawal rollers 234 and 236. The incremental withdrawal roller 234 has a plurality of teeth 260 and corresponding grooves 261 that extend around the entire periphery of the cylinder 23.4. The incremental withdrawal roller 236 has a plurality of teeth 262 and a plurality of corresponding grooves 263. The teeth 260 on the roller 234 engage or engage the grooves 263 on roller 236 while the teeth 262 on roller 236 engage or engage grooves 261 on roller 234. The teeth on one or both rollers may have formed channels 246 for example by machining such that areas of undeformed laminate sheet material may remain after tensioning. A suitable patterned cylinder is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,518,801.

Similarly, the incremental extraction can be performed by interlocking rolls oriented in accordance with FIG. 15. Such rolls have a series of ridges. 36Q ,. 362 and depressions 361_r 363_r The ridges form triangular teeth on the surface of the cylinder. One or both rollers may also have a row of spaced apart channels 346 that are oriented around the periphery of the cylindrical roll ... As shown, the rollers are effective in incrementally pulling a laminate having bonding points 50- having an I axis oriented generally in the belt parallel to the CD direction across the machine when processing.

In one embodiment, the method of manufacturing a laminate web of articles of the present invention may include incremental stretching in both the CD and MD directions. As can be seen from FIG. 16, two pairs of incremental pull-out pullers can be used.

4 · « • · * ·4 • 9 9 ·

9 The rollers in a row, such as one pair 232, which, as shown in Fig. 16, includes a row of spaced apart channels 246, pulls in the CD direction and the other pair 332 pulls out in the MD direction. In this way, many interesting texture-like textures can be made on the articles of the present invention. The resulting feel and appearance make such fabric belts ideal for use on the articles of the present invention.

Useful component:

The articles of the present invention further comprise a utility component that is disposed adjacent to the laminate strip. Because the products of the present invention are suitable for use in a variety of areas, eg, personal hygiene, household cleaning, etc., the utility component may be selected from the group consisting of skin cleansing ingredients, conditioning ingredients, cosmetic ingredients, cleansing ingredients, polishing ingredients. and combinations thereof.

Skin cleansing component:

A suitable component is a skin cleansing component which preferably has one or more detergents. The skin cleansing component is placed next to the laminate strip. In some embodiments, the cleaning component is deposited on one or more surfaces of layers or diapers of the laminate web. The products according to the invention comprise from 10% to 1000%, preferably from 50% to 600%, and even more preferably from 100% to 250%, based on the weight of the laminate web, of detergents. The articles of the present invention also preferably contain at least 1 g detergent per laminate weight. The cleaning component can be added to the web without the need for a drying process.

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0004.tif" />

9

99··

The detergent cleaners are preferably foaming detergents. As used herein, a foaming detergent means a detergent that when combined with water and mechanically stirred to form a foam. Such detergents are advantageous because increased foaming is important for consumers as an indication of cleaning efficiency. In some personal care embodiments, the detergents or combinations thereof are preferably delicate. As used herein, the term "fine" means that detergents as well as articles of the present invention exhibit fineness such that they are at least finer than conventional dice soap matrices, which generally include a combination of natural soap and synthetic detergents, e.g., Lever 2000® and Zest®. Methods for measuring the fineness or irritability of detergent-containing products are based on the skin barrier destruction test. In this test, the finer the detergent, the less the skin barrier is destroyed. Skin barrier destruction is measured by the relative amount of radioisotope (tritium) labeled water (3H-H).₂O) that passes from the test solution through the epidermis of the skin to the physiological buffer contained in the diffusate chamber. This test is described by TJ. Franz in J. Invest. Dermatol., 1975, 64, pp. 190-195 and in U.S. Pat. No. 4,673,525. Other test methodologies for determining the fineness of detergents well known to those skilled in the art may also be used.

A wide variety of foaming detergents can be used herein, including those selected from the group consisting of anionic foaming detergents, nonionic foaming detergents, cationic foaming detergents, amphoteric foaming detergents, and mixtures thereof.

Anionic foaming detergents:

• ·

Examples of anionic foaming detergents useful in the cleaning component of the article are described in: McCutcheon Detergents and Emulsifiers, North American edition (1986), published by Allured Publishing Corporation; McCutcheon: Functional Materials, North American edition (1992); and U.S. Pat. No. 3,929,678.

Detergents can be used here. non-limiting examples of anionic foaming agents include those selected from the group consisting of alkyl and alkyl ether sulfates, sulfated monoglycerides, sulfonated olefins, alkylarylsulfonates, primary or secondary alkanesulfonates, alkylsulfosuccinates, acyl sulfonate esters, acyltauronate esters, acyltauronate esters , sulfonated fatty acids, alkyl phosphates, ethoxylated alkyl phosphates, acylglutamates, acyl sarcosinates, alkylsulfoacetates, acylated peptides, alkyl ether carboxylates, acylalkylates, anionic fluorodetergents, and combinations thereof. Combinations of anionic detergents can be effectively used in the present invention.

Anionic detergents for use in the cleansing component include alkyl sulfates and alkyl ether sulfates. These materials have the corresponding formulas R^XO-SC3M and R¹ (CH2H4O) χ-Ο-δΟβΜ in which R¹ is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl group of 8 to 24 carbon atoms, x is 1 to 10, and M is a water-soluble cation such as ammonium, sodium, potassium, magnesium, triethanolamine, diethanolamine and monoethanolamine. Alkyl sulfates are generally made by sulfating monohydric alcohols having from 8 to 24 carbon atoms using sulfur trioxide or other known sulfation techniques. Alkyl ether sulfates are generally made as condensation products of ethylene oxide and monohydric

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0005.tif" />

of alcohols having from 8 to 24 carbon atoms which are then sulfated. These alcohols may be derived from fats, e.g., coconut oil or tall oil, or may be synthetic. Specific examples of alkyl sulfates that can be used in the cleaning component are sodium, ammonium, potassium, magnesium, or TEA salts of lauryl or myristyl sulfate. Examples of alkyl ether sulfates that can be used include ammonium, sodium, magnesium or TEA laureth-3-sulfate.

Another suitable class of anionic detergents are sulfated monoglycerides of formula R^XCO-O-CH 2 -C (OH) H-CH₂-O-SO₃M, where R¹ is a saturated or unsaturated branched or unbranched alkyl group of 8 to 24 carbon atoms, and M is a water-soluble cation such as ammonium, sodium, potassium, magnesium, triethanolamine, diethanolamine and monoethanolamine. Generally, they are made by reacting glycerine with fatty acids having from 8 to 24 carbon atoms to form a monoglyceride and subsequent sulfation of the monoglyceride with sulfur trioxide. An example of a sulfated monoglyceride is sodium cocomonoglyceride sulfate.

Other sulfonates of suitable anionic detergents include the R-shaped olefin¹S03M, where R¹ is a monoolefin having 12 to 24 carbon atoms and M is a water-soluble cation such as ammonium, sodium, potassium, magnesium, triethanolamine, diethanolamine and monoethanolamine. These compounds can be produced by sulfonating the alphaolefins with non-complex sulfur trioxide followed by neutralization of the acidic reaction mixture under conditions such that the sultones formed in the reaction are hydrolyzed to give the corresponding hydroxyalkane sulfonate. An example of a sulfonated olefin is C 1-6₄/Whose₆-alphaolef sodium sulfonate.

Other suitable anionic detergents are linear alkylbenzene sulfonates of formula R¹CgH₄-SO₃M, where R¹ it is a saturated or unsaturated alkyl group of 8 to 24 carbon atoms and M is a water-soluble cation such as ammonium, sodium, potassium, magnesium, triethanolamine, diethanolamine and monoethanolamine. It is formed by sulfonation of linear alkylbenzene with sulfur trioxide. An example of this anionic detergent is sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate.

Still other anionic detergents suitable for this cleaning component are the primary or secondary alkanesulfonates of formula R^xSO3M, where R¹ is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl chain of 8 to 24 carbon atoms and M is a water-soluble cation such as ammonium, sodium, potassium, magnesium, triethanolamine, diethanolamine and monoethanolamine. They are commonly formed by sulfonating paraffins using sulfur dioxide in the presence of chlorine and ultraviolet light, or by other known sulfonation methods. Sulfonation may occur at either the secondary or primary positions of the alkyl chain. Examples of alkanesulfonates useful herein are the alkali metal or ammonium paraffin C13-C17 sulfonates.

Still other suitable anionic detergents are alkylsulfosuccinates, which include disodium N-octadecylsulfosuccinamate, diammonium laurylsulfosuccinate, tetrasodium N- (1,2-dicarboxyethyl) -N-octadecylsulfosuccinate, sodium sulfosuccinic acid diamyl ester, sodium dihexyl ester, dihexyl ester, sodium dihexyl ester.

Taurates which are based on taurine, also known as 2-aminoethanesulfonic acid, can also be used. Examples of taurates include N-alkyltaurines, such as those prepared by reacting dodecylamine with sodium isethionate, as detailed in U.S. Pat. No. 2,658,072. Other taurine-based examples include acyltaurines formed from³⁶ by reacting n-methyltaurine with fatty acids having 8 to 24 carbon atoms.

Another class of anionic detergents suitable for use in the cleaning component are acyl isethionates. Acyl isethionates generally have the formula R¹CO-O-CH₂CH₂SO₃M, where R¹ is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl group having from 10 to 30 carbon atoms and M is a cation. These are generally formed by reacting fatty acids having from 8 to 30 carbon atoms with an alkali metal isethionate. Non-limiting examples of such acyl isethionates include ammonium cocoyl isethionate, sodium cocoyl isethionate, sodium lauroyl isethionate, and mixtures thereof.

Still other suitable anionic detergents are the alkyl glyceryl ether sulfonates of formula R¹-OCH₂--C (OH) H - CH₂SO₃M, where R¹ is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl group of 8 to 24 carbon atoms and M is a water-soluble cation such as ammonium, sodium, potassium, magnesium, triethanolamine, diethanolamine and monoethanolamine. These may be prepared by reacting epichlorohydrin and sodium bisulfite with fatty alcohols having from 8 to 24 carbon atoms, or by other known methods. One example is sodium coglyceryl ether sulfonate.

Other suitable anionic detergents are sulfonated fatty acids of formula R¹-CH (SO 4) -COOH and sulfonated methyl esters of formula R 1¹-CH (SO 4) -CO-O-CH 3 where R¹ is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl group of 8 to 24 carbon atoms. They can be formed by sulfonation of fatty acids or alkyl methyl esters having 8 to 24 carbon atoms with sulfur trioxide or other known sulfonation method. Examples include alpha-sulfonated coconut fatty acid and lauryl methyl ester.

Other anionic materials include phosphates such as 9 9 9 99

9 Monoalkyl, dialkyl and trialkylphosphate salts formed by the reaction of phosphorus pentoxide with monohydric branched or unbranched alcohols having from 8 to 24 carbon atoms. They can also be formed by other known phosphatizing methods. An example of this class of detergents is sodium mono- or dilauryl phosphate. Such phosphates may also be ethoxylated, e.g., ethoxylated monoalkyl phosphates.

Other anionic materials include acylglutamates corresponding to formula R¹CO-N (COOH) -CH 2 CH 2 CO 2 M, wherein R¹ is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl or alkenyl group of 8 to 24 carbon atoms and M is a water-soluble cation. Non-limiting examples thereof include sodium lauroyl glutamate and sodium cocoyl glutamate.

Other anionic materials include alkanoyl sarcosinates corresponding to formula R^XCON (CH₃-CH 2 CH 2 -CO 2 M, wherein R 1 is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl or alkenyl group having 10 to 20 carbon atoms, and M is a water-soluble cation. Non-limiting examples thereof include sodium lauroyl sarcosinate, sodium cocoyl sarcosinate, and ammonium lauroyl sarcosinate.

Other anionic materials include alkyl ether carboxylates of the formula R¹- (OCH 2 CH 2) X-OCH 2 -CO 2 M, where R¹ is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl or alkenyl group of 8 to 24 carbon atoms, x is 1 to 10 and M is a water-soluble cation. Non-limiting examples thereof include sodium laurethcarboxylate.

Other anionic materials include acyl lactylates corresponding to formula R^XCO- [O-CH (CH 3) -CO]_X-CO2M, where R¹ is saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched, alkyl or alkyl. An alkenyl group having 8 to 24 carbon atoms, x being 3 and M being a water-soluble cation. Non-limiting examples thereof include sodium cocoyl lactylate.

Other anionic materials include carboxylates, non-limiting examples of which include sodium lauroyl carboxylate, sodium cocoyl carboxylate, and ammonium lauroyl carboxylate. Anionic fluorosurfactants can also be used.

Other anionic materials include natural soaps derived from the saponification of vegetable and animal fats and oils, examples of which include sodium laurate, sodium myristate, palmitate, stearate, tallow, cocoate.

For the anionic detergent, any counter-cation M may be used. Preferably, the counter-cation is selected from the group consisting of monoethanolamine, diethanolamine and sodium, potassium and ammonium triethanolamine. Preferably, the countercation is ammonium.

Non-ionic foaming detergents:

Non-limiting examples of nonionic foaming detergents for use in the article cleaning component are described in McCutcheon: Detergents and Emulsifiers (North American edition (1986), published by Publishing Corporation and McCutcheon: Functional Materials North American edition (1992)).

The nonionic foaming detergents used herein include those selected from the group consisting of alkyl glucosides, alkyl polyglucosides, polyhydroxy fatty acid amides, alkoxylated fatty acid esters, sucrose esters, amine oxides, and mixtures thereof.

· 9 9 9 9 9 9999

9999 9 999 9 9 9

Alkylglucosides and alkylpolyglucosides can be used herein and can be broadly defined as the condensation products of long-chain alcohols, e.g., C8-C30 alcohols, with sugars or starches, or sugar or starch polymers, e.g., glycosides or polyglycosides. These compounds may be represented by formula (S)_n-OR, in which S is a sugar moiety such as glucose, fructose, mannose and galactose, n is an integer from 1 to about 1000 and R is an alkyl group of 8 to 30 carbon atoms. Examples of long chain alcohols from which an alkyl group may be derived include decyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol, stearyl alcohol, lauryl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, oleyl alcohol and the like. Particularly preferred examples of such detergents include those where S is a glucose moiety, R is an alkyl group of 8 to 20 carbon atoms, and is an integer from 1 to 9. Commercially available examples of such surfactants include decylpolyglucoside (available as APG 325 CS from the company And lauryl polyglucoside (available as APG 600CS from Henkel). Sucrose ester detergents such as sucrose cocoate and sucrose laurate can also be used.

Other useful nonionic detergents include polyhydroxy fatty acid amide detergents, more specific examples of which are glucosamides corresponding to the structural formula:

O Rl

F £ —CN - where R¹ is hydrogen, C1-C8 alkyl₄2-hydroxyethyl, 2-hydroxypropyl, preferably alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably methyl or ethyl, most preferably methyl, R² is alkyl or alkenyl of 5 to 31 carbon atoms, preferably alkyl or alkenyl of 7 to 19 atoms and Z is a polyhydroxyhydrocarbyl moiety having a linear hydrocarbyl chain of at least 3 hydroxyls directly attached to the chain, or an alkoxylated derivative thereof (preferably ethoxylated), or more preferably a C alkyl-C alkyl alkyl alkyl or alkenyl group. or propoxylated. Z is preferably a sugar moiety selected from the group consisting of glucose, fructose, maltose, lactose, glactose, mannose, xylose, and mixtures thereof. A particularly preferred detergent corresponding to the above structure is coconut alkyl-N-methylglycosidamide, i.e. wherein R is²COmoieta derived from coconut oil fatty acids. Methods for making compositions containing polyhydroxy fatty acid amides are described, for example, in GB 809 060, US 2 965 576, US 2 703 798 and US 1 985 424. Other examples of nonionic detergents include amine oxides. The amine oxides correspond to the general formula R¹R²R³N-&gt; 0, wherein R¹ it contains an alkyl, alkenyl or monohydroxyalkyl radical of 8 to 18 carbon atoms, from 0 to 10 ethylene oxide moieties and from 0 to 1 glyceryl moieties and² and R³ it contains from 1 to 3 carbon atoms and from 0 to 1 hydroxy groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, hydroxyethyl or hydroxypropyl radicals. The arrow in the formula is a conventional representation of a semipolar bond. Examples of amine oxides suitable for use in this invention include dimethyldodecylamine oxide, oleyldi (2-hydroxyethyl) amine oxide, dimethyloctylamine oxide, di-methyldecylamine oxide, dimethyltetradecylamine oxide, 3,6,9-trioxaheptadecyldiethylamine oxide, di (2-hydroxyethyl) -tetradecylamine oxide, 2-dodecoxyethyldimethylamine oxide, 3-dodecoxy-2-hydroxypropyldi (3-hydroxypropyl) amine oxide, dimethylhexadecylamine oxide.

Non-limiting examples of preferred nonionic detergents useful herein include those selected from the group consisting of C 8 -C 14 glucose amides, C 8 -C 14 alkyl polyglucosides, sucrose cocoate, sucrose laurate, lauramine oxide, cocoamine oxide, and mixtures thereof.

Cationic foaming detergents:

Cationic foaming detergents are also useful in the cleaning component of the articles of the present invention. Suitable cationic foaming detergents include, in particular, fatty amines, fatty quaternary amines, trimethyl quaternary amines, imidazolinium quaternary amines, and combinations thereof. Suitable fatty amines include monoalkyl quaternary amines such as cetyltrimethylammonium bromide. A suitable quaternary amine is dialkylamidoethylhydroxyethylammonium methosulfate. However, fatty amines are preferred. When the cationic suds detergent is the primary suds detergent of the cleaning component, a suds enhancer is preferably used. In addition, nonionic detergents have been found to be particularly useful in combination with such cationic foaming detergents.

• 4 »· ♦ · 99 44 44 · 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

9 999 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

Amphoteric foaming detergents:

The term amphoteric foaming detergent as used herein is also meant to include zwitterion-related detergents which are well known to formulators in the art as a subset of amphoteric detergents.

A wide variety of amphoteric foaming detergents can be used in the cleaning component of the present invention. Particularly useful are those which are widely described as derivatives of aliphatic secondary and tertiary amines, with the advantage of those in which the nitrogen is in the cationic state, in which the aliphatic radicals may be straight or branched chain and wherein one of the radicals contains an ionizable water-soluble group, for example, carboxylic, sulfonate, sulfate, phosphate, or phosphonate.

Non-limiting examples of amphoteric detergents useful in the present invention are described in McCutcheon: Detergents and Emulsifiers, North American Edition (1986), edited by Allured Publishing Corporation and Mc Cutcheon: Functional Materials, North American Edition (1986). 1992).

Non-limiting examples of amphoteric or zwitterionic-related detergents are those selected from the group consisting of betaine, sultains, hydroxysultains;

4 4 49 • · · •4 9494

<td>alkyliminoacetates,</td><td>43 iminodialkanoates, aminoalkanoates and their</td>

<td>mixtures.</td><td></td>

Examples of betaines include higher alkyl betaines such as cocodimethylcarboxymethyl betaine, lauryldimethylcarboxymethyl betaine, lauryldimethylalfacarboxyethyl betaine, cethyldimethylcarboxymethyl betaine, lauryldimethylalfacarboxyethyl betaine, cethyldimethylcarboxymethyl betaine, cetyldimethylbetaine betaine (available from Lonzaine) (2-hydroxypropyl) -alpha-carboxyethyl betaine, cocodimethylsulfopropylbetain, lauryldimethylsulfoethylbetain, laurylbis- (2-hydroxyethyl) sulfopropylbetain, amidobetaines and amidosulfobetaines (wherein the radical is RCONH (CH₂13 is attached to the nitrogen atom of the betina), oleylbetain (available as amphoteric

Velvetex OLB-50 from Henkel) and cocoamidopropyl betaine (available as Velvetex BK-35 and BA-35 from Henkel).

Examples of sultaines and hydroxysultaines include materials such as cocamidopropylhydroxysultin (available as Mirataine CBS from Rhone-Poulenc).

Amphoteric detergents having the following structure are preferred for use herein:

·♦· · · · · · · · · • · · ·« 9 9 99 9 9 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

99 99 ·· ·· 9999

R2 +1

R 1 - (C - NH - (CH 2 -) - N^-R^4-χR3 where R¹ is an unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, straight or branched alkyl having from 9 to 22 carbon atoms. Preferred R¹has from 11 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably from 12 to 18 carbon atoms, even more preferably from 14 to 18 carbon atoms, m is an integer from 1 to 3, more preferably from 2 to 3 and even more preferably 3, n is either 0 or 1 , preferably 1, R² and R³ are independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, unsubstituted or monosubstituted with hydroxy;² and R³ preferably CH 3, X is selected from saturated or unsaturated, straight or branched alkyl chains, unsubstituted or monosubstituted by hydroxy having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms. When X is CO 2, it has R⁴ preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, preferably 1 carbon atom. When X is SO 3 or SO 4, R⁴ preferably has 2 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably 3 carbon atoms.

Examples of amphoteric detergents of the present invention include the following compounds:

Cethyldimethylbetaine (this material also has the CTFA designation cetylbetaine) / / Ks ΐ 6H33- N — CHj — CO2 cocamidopropyl betaine

Φ Φ &lt;ΦΦΦΦ?

R —C —Nt— (CH ^-Ν-CH--COf CH 3 where R has 9 to 13 carbon atoms, cocamidopropylhydroxysultain o CH 3 OH ·

RC-NH- (C1-4JYN-CH2-CH-C1-4-SQ,

CH 3 wherein R has 9 to 13 carbon atoms.

Examples of other useful amphoteric detergents are alkyliminoacetates and iminodialkanoates and aminoalkanoates of formulas RN [CH₂)_mWHAT₂M] 2 _and RNH (CH₂)_mWHAT₂M wherein m is 1 to 4, R is alkyl or alkenyl of 8 to 22 carbon atoms and M is hydrogen, alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, ammonium or alkanolammonium. Also included are imidazolinium and ammonium derivatives. Specific examples of suitable amphoteric detergents include sodium 3-dodecylaminopropionate, sodium 3-dodecylaminopropanesulfonate, Higher alkyllaspartic acids such as those produced according to U.S. Pat. Other examples of amphoteric agents include amphoteric phosphates, such as coamidopropylPG-dimmonium chloride phosphate, commercially available as Monaquat PTC from Mona Corp.. Amphoacetates such as disodium lauroamphodiacetate, sodium lauroamfoacetate and mixtures thereof may also be used.

Preferred lathering detergents are selected from the group consisting of &amp; lt; RTI ID = 0.0 &amp; gt; &amp; lt; / RTI &amp; gt;

99 9 9 of anionic foaming detergents selected from the group consisting of ammonium lauroyl sarcosinate, sodium trideceth sulfate, sodium lauroyl sarcosinate, ammonium laureth sulfate, sodium laureth sulfate, ammonium lauryl sulfate, sodium lauryl sulfonate, cocoylisethionate, cocoylisethionate, , sodium cetyl sulfate, sodium monolauryl phosphate, sodium ethoxylated monoalkyl phosphates, sodium cocoglyceryl ether sulfonate, sodium soaps Cg to C₂2 and combinations thereof, nonionic foaming detergents selected from the group consisting of lauramine oxide, cocoamine oxide, decylpolyglucose, laurylpolyglucose, sucrose cocoate, glucosamides C_i2 to C_i4, sucrose laurate and combinations thereof, cationic foaming detergents selected from the group consisting of fatty amines, di-fatty quaternary amines, trivalent quaternary amines, imidazolinium quaternary amines, and combinations thereof, amphoteric foaming detergents selected from the group consisting of disodium lauroamphodiacetate, sodium lauroamphacetate, lauro cethyldimethylbetaine, cocoamidopropylbetaine, cocoamidopropylhydroxysultaine and combinations thereof.

Conditioner:

In some embodiments of the present invention, the articles essentially comprise a preferred component which is a conditioning component. The conditioning component is disposed adjacent to the water-soluble substrate and comprises 10% to 1000%, more preferably 10% to 500%, and most preferably 10% to 250%, based on the weight of the laminate strip, conditioning agent. The conditioning component is preferably located on the surface of one or more layers of the laminate strip. More preferably, the conditioning component is disposed on one or more outer surfaces of the resulting laminate strip. Preferably, the conditioning agent is selected from the group consisting of 99 99

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

9 9 99 9 9 99 9 9 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

99 99 99 99 9999 hydrophobic conditioning agents, hydrophilic conditioning agents, structured conditioning agents and combinations thereof.

Hydrophobic conditioning agents:

The articles of the present invention may include one or more hydrophobic conditioning agents that can be used to provide a conditioning benefit to the skin or hair during use of the article. The articles of the present invention preferably comprise 0.5% to 1000%, more preferably 1% to 200%, and most preferably 10% to 100%, based on the weight of the laminate web, of the hydrophobic conditioning agent.

The hydrophobic conditioning agent may be selected from one or more hydrophobic conditioning agents such that the weighted arithmetic mean solubility parameter of the hydrophobic conditioning agent is less than or equal to 10.5. Based on this mathematical definition of the solubility parameters, it is known that, for example, the desired weighted mean solubility parameter can be achieved, i. less than or equal to 10.5 for a hydrophobic conditioning agent comprising two or more compounds when one of the compounds has an individual solubility parameter greater than 10.5.

Solubility parameters are well known to a chemist with ordinary skill in the art of preparing these formulations and are routinely used as a guide to determining the compatibility and solubility of materials in the formulation process.

The solubility parameter of a chemical compound δ is defined as the square of the cohesive energy density for that compound. The solubility parameter of a compound is generally calculated from * 4 ♦ · • · 4

4 ··· • 4 44 • 4 4 4 • 4 44 • 4 44

4 · 4 · 4

44 4 4 4 4 4 4 44

44 »4 44 44 9444 TABLE values ​​of the additive group contributions for the heat of vaporization and molar volume of the components of this compound using the following equation:

1/2

Σε,

ZίΤ1 | · where ZiEj is the sum of the contributions to the heat of evaporation for the additive group and Σιπίί is the sum of the contributions to the molar volume for the additive group.

Standard evaporative heat and molar volume tables for a wide range of atoms and atomic groups are summarized in Barton, AFM Handbook of Solubility Paramethers, CRC Press, Chapter 6, Table 3, pp. 64-66 (1985). The above solubility parameter equation is described in Fedors, RF, A Method for Estimating Both Solubility Parameters and Molar Volumes of Liquids, Polymer Engineering and Science, vol. 14, no. 2, pp. 147-154 (February 1974).

The solubility parameters follow the mixture rule in the sense that the solubility parameter for a mixture of materials is given by the weighted arithmetic mean (ie, the weighted average) of the solubility parameters for each component of the mixture. See Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 57th ed., CRC Press, pp. C-726 (1976-1977). Chemists making preparations generally report and use solubility parameters

1* 44 4* 44 4*

4 4 4 4 · W 44 * 4

I »» «« 4 4 * »» 4 4 · · · 4 4 · 4 «4« «4« 4 ·· »« · 44 44 4444 units (cal / cm)³)^1/2. The tabulated values ​​for the additive heat additive group contributions in the Handbook of Solubility Paramethers are given in kJ / mol, but these tabular heat of evaporation can be easily converted to cal / mol using the following well known relationships:

J / mol = 0.239006 cal / mol and 1000 J = 1 kJ.

see Gordon, AJ et al., The Chemist's Companion, John Wiley &amp; Sons, pp. 456-463, (1972).

Solubility parameters have also been tabulated for a wide variety of chemical materials. Tables of solubility parameters are found in the Handbook of Solubility Paramethers cited above. See also Solubility Effects In Product, Package, Penetration, and Preservation, Vaughan CD, Cosmetics and Toiletries, Vol. 103, October 1988, pp. 47-69.

Non-limiting examples of hydrophobic conditioning agents include those selected from the group consisting of mineral oil, petrolatum, lecithin, lanolin, lanolin derivatives, branched chain C hydrocarbons₇ to C₄o, esters of C1-C30 alcohols and C1-C30 carboxylic acids, C1-C30 alcohols esters and C-dicarboxylic acids₂ C 1 to C 30, C 1 to C 30 monoglycerides, C 1 to C 20 diglycerides_x to C₃₀, carboxylic acid triglycerides C_x to C₃₀, ethylene glycol monoesters of carboxylic acids C_x to C₃₀, ethylene glycol diesters of carboxylic acids C_x to C30, propylene glycol monoesters of carboxylic acids C_x to C30, propylene glycol diesters of carboxylic acids C_xto C₃₀ monoesters of carboxylic acid C_x to C₃₀ and polyesters r * 0 * • «• ··· • · ·

0* 4« »0 00 00 0*

00 « 0 00 «

0 00 · 0 0

0 4 · 440 • 4 44 40 400 · sugars, polydialkylsiloxanes, polydiarylsiloxanes, polyalkarylsiloxanes, cyclomethicones having 3 to 9 silicon atoms, vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils, polypropylene glycol alkyl ethers with C₄ to C₂alkyls, C 8 -C 30 dialkyl ethers and combinations thereof.

Mineral oil, also known as petrolatum liquid, is a mixture of liquid hydrocarbons derived from petroleum. See Merck Index, 10th edition, item 7048, p. 1033 (1983) and

International Cosmetic Ingredient Dictionary, 5th Edition, Volume 1, pp. 415-417 (1993).

Petrolatum, also known as yellow petrolatum, is a colloidal system of non-straight-chain solid hydrocarbons and high-boiling liquid hydrocarbons in which most of the liquid hydrocarbons are maintained within micelles. See The Merck Index, 10th Edition, item 7047, p. 1033 (1983); Schindler,

Drug. Cosmet. Ind., 89, 36-37, 76, 78-80, 82 (1961); and International Cosmetic Ingredient Dictionary, 5th Edition, Volume 1, p. 537 (1993).

Lecithin is also used as a hydrophobic conditioning agent. It is a naturally occurring mixture of diglycerides of certain fatty acids bound to the choline phosphoric ester.

Straight and branched chain hydrocarbons having from 7 to 40 carbon atoms can be used herein. Non-limiting examples of these hydrocarbon materials include dodecane, isododecane, squalan, cholesterol, hydrogenated polyisobutylene, docosane (i.e., C22 hydrocarbon), hexadecane, isohexadecane (a commercially available hydrocarbon sold as Permethyl® 101A by Presperse, South Plainfield, NJ, USA). use isoparaffins C₇ to C₄₀of which are branched hydrocarbons₇ to C₄₀Polydecene, a branched liquid hydrocarbon can also be used herein and is commercially available under the trade names Puresyn 100® and Puresyn 3000® from Mobile Chemical (Edison, NJ, USA).

Also useful are esters of C1-C30 carboxylic acids C1-C30 and di-carboxylic acids C₂ to C30, including straight and branched chain materials, as well as aromatic derivatives. Also useful are esters such as C1 to C30 carboxylic acid monoglycerides, carboxylic acid diglycerides

<td colspan="4">C1-C30 acids, carboxylic acid triglycerides</td><td colspan="2">Ci to C30 /</td>

<td>ethylene glycol monoesters</td><td>carboxyl groups</td><td>of acids</td><td>Whose</td><td>to</td><td>C30,</td>

<td>ethylene glycol diesters</td><td>carboxyl groups</td><td>of acids</td><td>Whose</td><td>to</td><td>C30r</td>

<td>propylene glycol monoesters</td><td>carboxyl groups</td><td>of acids</td><td>Whose</td><td>to</td><td>C30 a</td>

<td>propylene glycololdiesters</td><td>carboxyl groups</td><td>of acids</td><td>Whose</td><td>to</td><td>C30 ·</td>

straight chain, branched chain and aryl carboxylic acids are included herein. Propoxylated and ethoxylated derivatives of these materials can also be used. Nonlimiting examples include diisopropyl sebacate, diisopropyl adipate, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, myristyl propionate, ethylene glycol distearate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate, isodecyl neopentanoate, di-2-ethylhexyl maleate, cethylpalmitát, myristylmyristate, stearyl, cethylstearát, behenyl behenrate, dioctylmaleate, dioctyl sebacate, diisopropyl adipate, cethyl octanoate, diisopropyl, caprylic / carp triglyceride, PEG-6, caprylic / carp triglyceride, PEG-8 caprylic / carp triglyceride and combinations thereof.

Various C 1 to C 30 sugar monoesters and polyesters and the like are also useful. These esters are derived from a sugar or polyol moiety and one or more moieties of a carboxylic acid. Depending on the acid and sugar used, these esters may be at room temperature in either liquid or solid form. Examples of liquid esters include: glucose tetraoleate, glucose and fatty acid tetraesters of soybean oil (unsaturated), mannose tetraesters and mixtures of soybean fatty acids, galactose and oleic acid tetraesters, arabinose and linoleic acid tetraesters, xylose tetralinoleate, galactose pentaoleate, sorbitol tetraesate and sorbitol hexaesters soybean oil fatty acids, xylitol pentaoleate, sucrose tetraoleate, sucrose pentaoleate, sucrose hexaoleate, sucrose heptaoleate, sucrose octaoleate and mixtures thereof. Examples of solid esters include sorbitol hexaester in which the carboxylic acid ester moieties are palmitoleate and arachidate in a molar ratio of 1: 2; raffinose octaester in which the carboxylic acid ester moieties are linoleate and behenate in a molar ratio of 1: 3; a maltose heptaester in which the carboxylic acid esterifying moieties are sunflower oil fatty acid and lignocerate in a molar ratio of 3: 4; an octaester of sucrose wherein the esterifying moieties of carboxylic acid are oleate and behenate in a 2: 6 molar ratio; and an octaester of sucrose where the esterifying moieties of carboxylic acid are laurate, linoleate and behenate in a molar ratio of 1: 3: 4. A particularly preferred solid material is sucrose polyester in which the degree of esterification is 7-8 and in which the fatty acid moieties are mono- or di-unsaturated C 18 and behenic, in molar ratios of unsaturated to behenic 1: 7 to 3: 5. A particularly preferred solid sugar polyester is an octaesteer of sucrose in which there are about 7 moles of fatty behenic acid and about 1 molar oleic acid per molecule. Other materials include sucrose fatty acid esters of cottonseed oil or soybean oil. Further, the ester materials are U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,306,516, 3,963,699, and U.S. Pat

U.S. 4,518,772

831 854, US 4,005,196,

515, 5,305,514, and 4,517,360.

described in US 4,005,195, US 4,797,300,

Nonvolatile silicones such as polydialkylsiloxanes, polydiarylsiloxanes and polyalkarylsiloxanes are also suitable oils. These silicones are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,069,897. Polyalkylsiloxanes correspond to the general chemical formula:

R3SiO [R₂SiO]_xSiR 3, wherein R is an alkyl group, preferably R is methyl or ethyl, more preferably methyl, and x is an integer up to 500, selected to achieve the desired molecular weight. Commercially available polyalkylsiloxanes include polydimethylsiloxanes, also known as dimethicones, non-limiting examples of which include the Vicasil® series sold by General Electric Company and the Dow Corning® 200 series sold by Dow Corning Corporation. Specific examples of polydimethylsiloxanes that may be used herein include Dow Corning® 225 having a viscosity of 10 cSt (0.1 cm).²and boiling points greater than 200 ° C and Dow Corning® 200 fluids having viscosities of 50, 350 and 12500 cSt (0.5; 3.5; 125 cm)²and boiling points greater than 200 ° C. Also useful are materials such as trimethylsiloxysilicate, which is a polymeric material corresponding to the general chemical formula:

[(CH₂) 3SiO1 / 2] x [S1O2] _ywherein x is an integer from 1 to 500 and y is an integer from 1 to 500. Commercially available trimethylsiloxysilicate is sold as a mixture with dimethicone as a Dow Corning® 593 liquid. Dimethiconols, which are hydroxyl-terminated dimethylsilicones, can also be used herein. The following materials may be represented by general chemical formulas:

• * · · · · · • ·· · · ·

R3S1O [R₂SiO] _xSiR₂OH and HOR2SiO [R2SiO] _xSiR 2 OH, where R is an alkyl group (preferably R is methyl or ethyl, more preferably methyl) and χ is an integer up to 500, chosen to achieve the desired molecular weight, typically sold

Commercially available dimethiconols are as mixtures with dimethicone or cyclomethicone (eg, Dow Corning® 1401, 1402 and 1403 fluids). Also useful herein are polyalkylarylsiloxanes, with polymethylphenylsiloxanes having viscosities of from 15 to 65 cSt (0.15 to 0.65 cm) being preferred.²(s) at 25 ° C. These materials are available, for example, as SF 1075 methylphenyl liquid (sold by General Electric Company) and cosmetic grade phenyltrimethicone liquid 556 (sold by Dow Corning Corporation). Alkylated silicones such as methyldecylsilicone and methyloctylsilicone can also be used and are commercially available from General Electric Company. Alkylmodified siloxanes, such as alkylmethicones and alkyldimethicones, wherein the alkyl chain contains 19 to 50 carbon atoms, can also be used. Such siloxanes are commercially available under the trade names ABIL WAX 9810 (alkylmethicone C₂₄ to C₂e), sold by Goldschmidt, and SF1632 (cetearylmethicone) sold by General Electric Company.

Also useful herein are vegetable oils and hydrogenated vegetable oils. Examples of vegetable oils of hydrogenated vegetable oils include saflover oil, castor oil, coconut oil, cottonseed oil, menhaden oil, palm kernel oil, palm oil, peanut oil, soybean oil, rapeseed oil, linseed oil, rice oil, pine oil, sesame oil, sunflower oil, hydrogenated saflover oil, hydrogenated castor oil, hydrogenated coconut oil, hydrogenated cottonseed oil, hydrogenated menhaden oil, hydrogenated palm kernel oil, hydrogenated palm oil, hydrogenated peanut oil, hydrogenated soybean oil, hydrogenated rapeseed oil, hydrogenated linseed oil, hydrogenated rice bran oil, hydrogenated sesame oil, hydrogenated sunflower oil and mixtures thereof.

C can also be used₄ up to C20 alkyl ethers of polypropylene glycols, carboxylic acid esters of 1 to 20 carbon atoms and polypropylene glycols and di-C₈ to C₃₀ alkyl ethers. Non-limiting examples of such materials include PPG-14-butyl ether, PPG-15 stearlyl ether, dioctyl ether, dodecyloctyl ether, and mixtures thereof.

Hydrophobic chelating agents can also be used herein as hydrophobic conditioning agents. Suitable agents are described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,387,244 and U.S. Patent Application Ser. Nos. 09/258,747 and 09/259,485.

Particularly preferred hydrophobic conditioning agents are selected from the group consisting of mineral oil, petrolatum, lecithin, hydrogenated lecithin, lanolin, lanolin derivatives, C hydrocarbons₇ to C₄branched chain esters_x to C₃₀ and C1 to C carboxylic acids₃₀esters of C1-C alcohols₃o and di carboxylic acids C1 to C₃₀, C1 to C30 carboxylic acid monoglycerides, C1 to C30 diglycerides of carboxylic acids, C1 to C triglycerides of carboxylic acids₃₀, ethylene glycol monoesters of C1 to C carboxylic acids₃₀, ethylene glycol diesters of carboxylic acids C_x to C₃₀, propylene glycol monoesters of C1 to C carboxylic acids₃o, C1-C30 carboxylic acid propylene glycol diesters, C1-C30 carboxylic acid monoesters and polyesters and sugars, polydialkylsiloxanes, polydiarylsiloxanes, polyalkylarylsiloxanes, cyclomethicones having 3 to 9 silicone atoms, vegetable oils, polypropylene glycol C oils, polypropylene glycol C oils,₄ to C20 alkyl ethers of di.C.₈ to C₃o-alkyl ethers and combinations thereof.

Hydrophilic conditioning agents:

The articles of the present invention may also include a preferred compound which comprises one or more hydrophilic conditioning agents. Non-limiting examples of hydrophilic conditioning agents include those selected from the group consisting of polyhydric alcohols, polypropylene glycols, polyethylene glycols, ureas, pyrrolidonecarboxylic acids, ethoxylated or propoxylated sugars, polyacrylic acid copolymers, sugars having up to 12 carbon atoms, about sugar alcohols having up to 12 carbon atoms and mixtures thereof. Specific useful hydrophilic conditioning agents materials such as urea, guanidine, glycolic acid and glycolate salts, for example, ammonium and quaternary ammonium, lactic and lactate salts, for example, ammonium and quaternary alkylammonium, sucrose, fructose, glucose, erythritol, glycerol, mannitol, mannitol propylene glycol, butylene glycol, hexylene glycol polyethylene glycols such as PEG-2, PEG-3, PEG-30, PEG-50, polypropylene glycols such as PPG-9, PPG-12, PPG-15, PPG-17, PPG examples include eruthrose, hexantriol, and the like,

20, PPG-26, PPG-30, PPG-34, alkoxylated glucose, hyaluronic acid, skin-cationic cationic polymers, for example, quaternary ammonium polymers such as polyquaternary polymers, and mixtures thereof. In particular, glycerol is the preferred hydrophilic conditioning agent in the products of the present invention. Also suitable are materials such as aloe vera in any variety of form, for example aloe vera gel, chitosan and chitosan derivatives, for example chitosanlactate, lactamide monoethanolamine, acetamide monoethanolamine and mixtures thereof. Also suitable are propoxylated glycerols, such as the propoxylated glycerols described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,976,953.

• · ··

The preferred compound may be in a variety of forms. In one embodiment of the present invention, the emulsion component is preferred. For example, oil-in-water, water-in-oil, water-in-oil-in-water and oil-in-water-in-silicone emulsions can be used. In the context of emulsions, water means not only water but also water-soluble or water-miscible agents such as glycerin.

Particularly preferred compounds include an emulsion that further comprises an aqueous phase and an oil phase. It will be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that the component will preferably be distributed to the aqueous or oily phase depending on the water solubility or dispersibility of the therapeutically beneficial agent in the component. In one embodiment, the oil phase comprises one or more hydrophobic conditioning agents. In another embodiment, the aqueous phase comprises one or more hydrophilic conditioning agents.

Preferred components of the present invention that are in emulsion form generally comprise an aqueous phase and an oil or lipid phase. Suitable oils or lipids may be of animal, vegetable or petroleum origin and may be natural or synthetic, i.e., man-made. Suitable oil and water phase components are discussed above. Particularly preferred emulsion forms include water in oil emulsions, water in silicone emulsions and other inverse emulsions. In addition, particularly preferred emulsions also contain a hydrophilic conditioning agent, such as glycerin, to form an emulsion of glycerin in oil.

The preferred component, in particular the conditioning component of the present invention, which is in emulsion form will preferably further comprise from 1% to 10%, preferably from 2% to 5%, of an emulsifier, i.e. a detergent, based on the weight of the preferred component. The emulsifiers may be nonionic, anionic or cationic. Appropriate ·······················

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 emulsifiers are described above, as well as in the patents

U.S. Pat. No. 3,755,560, U.S. Pat. No. 4,421,769 and McCutcheon, Detergents and Emulsifiers, North American edition, pp. 317-324 (1986). Preferred components in emulsion form may also contain an antifoaming agent to minimize foaming upon application to the skin. Antifoaming agents include high molecular weight silicones and other materials well known in the art for such use.

The preferred component may also be in the form of a microemulsion. As used herein, the term microemulsion means thermodynamically stable mixtures of two immiscible solvents, one being non-polar and the other polar, which are stabilized by an amphiphilic molecule, a detergent. Preferred microemulsions include a water-in-oil microemulsion.

Structured conditioning agents:

A preferred component, which is a conditioning component, may also include structured conditioning agents. Suitable structured conditioning agents include, but are not limited to, vesicle structures such as ceramides, liposomes, and the like.

In another embodiment, conditioning agents of the preferred ingredient are included in the coacervate-forming compositions. The coacervate-forming composition preferably comprises a cationic polymer, an anionic detergent, and a dermatologically acceptable carrier for the polymer and detergent. The cationic polymer may be selected from the group consisting of natural backbone quaternary ammonium polymers, synthetic backbone quaternary ammonium polymers, natural backbone amphoteric polymers, synthetic backbone amphoteric polymers, and combinations thereof.

··· • · • ·· » · 4

4449 polyquaternia-7, polyquaternia-17, polyquaternia-32, polyquaternia-44, polyquaternia-16, polyquaternia-28, polyquaternia-43, polymethacrylamido59

More preferably, the cationic polymer is selected from the group consisting of natural backbone quaternary ammonium polymers selected from the group consisting of polyquaternia-4, polyquaternia-10, polyquaternia-24, PG-hydroxypropylguarhydroxypropyltrimmonium chlorides and combinations thereof, synthetic backbone quaternary ammonium polymers selected from the group consisting of from polyquaternia-2, polyquaternia-6, polyquaternia-11, polyquaternia-18, polyquaternia-37, polyquaternia-46, propyltrimonium chloride, acrylamidopropyltrimonium chloride / acrylamide copolymer and combinations thereof, natural backbone amphoteric polymers selected from the group consisting of chitosan, quaternized proteins, hydrolysed proteins and combinations thereof, synthetic backbone amphoteric polymers selected from the group consisting of polyquaternium, polyquaternia, -47, a copolymer of adipic acid and dimethylaminohydroxypropyldiethylenetriamine, a copolymer of polyvinylpyrrolidone and dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate, a copolymer of vinylcaprolactam and polyvinylpyrrolidone and dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate, a terpolymer of vinylcaprolactam, polyvinylpyrrolidone and dimethylaminopropylmethacrylamide, a copolymer of polyvinylpyrrolidone, dimethylaminopropyl amide. Even more preferably, the cationic polymer is a synthetic backbone amphoteric polymer. Even more preferably, the cationic polymer is a polyamine.

When the cationic polymer is a polyamine, it is preferred that the cationic polyamine polymer is selected from the group consisting of polyethyleneimines, polyvinylamines, polypropyleneimines, polylysines, and combinations thereof. Even more preferably, the cation is fc ··· · ··· · ··· ··· ··· ··· Polyamine polymer polyethyleneimine.

In some embodiments in which the cationic polymer is a polyamine, the polyamine may be hydrophobically or hydrophilically modified. In this case, the cationic polyamine polymer is selected from the group consisting of benzylated polyamines, ethoxylated polyamines, propoxylated polyamines, alkylated polyamines, amidated polyamines, esterified polyamines, and combinations thereof. The coacervate-forming composition comprises from 0.01% to 20%, more preferably from 0.05% to 10%, and most preferably from 0.1% to 5% by weight of the coacervate-forming cationic polymer blend.

Suitable anionic detergents for use in the context of coacervate formation include those discussed above about the cleansing component. Preferably, an anionic detergent is selected for the coacervate-forming composition from the group consisting of sarcosinates, glutamates, sodium alkyl sulfates, ammonium alkyl sulfates, sodium alkyl ethyl sulfates, ammonium alkyl ethyl sulfates, ammonium laureth sulfate, sodium laureth n-sulfates, isethionates. combinations. More preferably, the anionic detergent is selected from the group consisting of sodium lauroyl sarcosinate, sodium lauroyl glutamate, sodium alkyl sulfates, ammonium alkyl sulfates, sodium alkyl ethyl sulfates, ammonium alkyl ethyl sulfates, and combinations thereof.

Suitable coacervate-forming compositions are further described in US Patent Applications 09/397 747, US 09/397 746, US 09/397 712,

US 09/397 723 and US 09/397 722.

Alternatively, the coacervate-forming composition may comprise an anionic polymer, a cationic detergent, and a dermatologically acceptable carrier for the polymer and detergent. The anionic polymer may be selected from the group consisting of anionic polymer and an anionic polymer. A group consisting of polyacrylic acid polymers, polyacrylamide polymers, copolymers of acrylic acid, acrylamide and other natural or synthetic polymers such as polystyrene, polybutene, polyurethane, etc., natural derived gums and combinations thereof. Suitable gums include alginates such as propylene glycol alginate, pectins, chitosans such as chitosan lactate and modified gums such as starch octenyl succinate, and combinations thereof. More preferably, the anionic polymer is selected from the group consisting of polyacrylic acid polymers, polyacrylamide polymers, pectins, chitosans, and combinations thereof. Particularly preferred products of the present invention comprise from 0.01% to 20%, more preferably from 0.05% to 10%, and most preferably from 0.1% to 5% by weight of the coacervate-forming anionic polymer blends. Suitable cationic detergents include, but are not limited to, those discussed herein.

Cosmetic component:

In the field of personal care, the utility of the article is suitable for providing therapeutic or aesthetic benefits to the skin or hair by imposing not only conditioning agents, but also various agents including, but not limited to, anti-acne active agents such as deodorants or antiperspirants, wrinkle formation, antimicrobial, antifungal, anti-inflammatory, as a topical anesthetic, artificially producing a tan-like appearance and accelerating tan, anti-viral agents, sunscreen enzymes, antioxidant, skin peeling agents and combinations thereof. These additional active ingredients are further detailed below in the optional additional ingredients section below

Other cosmetic ingredients that are suitable for inclusion in the subject article are bases, reds, blemishes, blends, and other typical cosmetic coloring products. Such ingredients actually result in an article of the present invention that is suitable for makeup applications.

It is also to be understood that a preferred component may comprise a combination of a cleaning component, a conditioning component, a cosmetic component, a cleaning component, a polishing component, etc. in such a way as to form a uniform preferred component with indistinguishable impurities and multiple functions.

Cleaner:

For use in household cleaning, the useful ingredient of the product is suitable to provide benefits in cleaning domestic surfaces, for example hard surfaces such as kitchen countertops, walls, washbasins, bathtubs, floors, windows, etc. Such preferred ingredients are then referred to as cleaning ingredients. . Such cleaning components are preferably liquids since they can be easily applied to contaminated surfaces in a uniform and concentrated manner. However, solid cleansing components are also acceptable when dissolved in water or other liquid in use. The cleaning components of the present invention include a safe and effective amount of a relatively hydrophilic polymer that will render the treated surface hydrophilic. This increase in hydrophilicity provides an improved final appearance by coating the water on the surface or by spreading water over the surface, and this effect is preferably seen when the surface is rewetted and even when it is subsequently dried after rewetting.

In those products of the present invention that are intended to be used as a daily shower product, the coating effect is particularly notable since most of the surfaces treated are vertical surfaces. Thus, advantages have been observed on glass, ceramics and even more when wetting surfaces such as porcelain glaze. When the water evenly covers the surface or is spread over the surface, the formation of hard water spots that are formed after drying is minimized. In an article of the present invention that is intended to be used in the context of a floor cleaner, the polymer improves surface wetting and aids cleaning.

The polymeric property is advantageous because it extends the benefits of coating and cleaning. Another advantageous feature of the preferred polymers is that there is no residue after drying. Compositions comprising particularly preferred polymers dry more evenly on the floors and improve the end result with little or no haze.

Many materials can provide coatings and have the advantages of not staining, but particularly preferred materials are polymers that contain amine oxide hydrophilic groups. Polymers containing other hydrophilic groups, such as sulfonate, pyrrolidone and / or carboxyl groups, may also be used. Examples of desirable polysulfonate polymers include polyvinyl sulfonate and more preferably polystyrene sulfonate such as those sold by Monomer-Polymer Dajac (1675 Bustleton Pike, Feasterville, Pennsylvania 19053, USA. A typical formula is as follows:

[CH (C₆H₄SO₃Na) -CH₂] _n-CH (C.₆H₅) -CH₂wherein n is a number indicating the appropriate molecular weight as described below.

Typical molecular weights are from 10,000 to 1,000,000, preferably from 200,000 to 700,000. Especially preferred polymers.

9999 9 9 99 9

9 · 9999 such as polyvinyl (available from ISP) and containing pyrrolidone functionality include polyvinylpyrrolidone, quaternized pyrrolidone derivatives (such as Gafquat 755N from International Specialty Products), and copolymers containing pyrrolidone, pyrrolidone / dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate polyvinylpyrrolidone / acrylate from BASF). Other materials may also provide mass and hydrophilicity, including cationic materials that also contain hydrophilic groups and polymers that contain multiple ether bonds. Cationic materials include cationic sugar and / or starch derivatives, and typical block copolymer detergent surfactants based on mixtures of polypropylene oxide and ethylene oxide are representative of polyether materials. However, the polyether materials are less massive.

Particularly preferred polymers include water-soluble amine oxide moieties.

Preferred polymers include water-soluble amine oxide moieties. It is believed that the partial positive charge of the amine oxide group can act to adhere the polymer to the surface of the substrate that is on the surface, allowing water to more easily spread into the layer. The amine oxide moiety can also bind through hydrogen with hard surface substrates such as ceramic tiles, glass, fiberglass, porcelain glaze, linoleum, wax-free tiles and other hard surfaces commonly used in consumer homes. To the extent that the anchoring of the polymer aids in better layering, higher molecular weight materials are preferred. Improved molecular weight improves the efficiency of amine oxide-based polymers. Particularly preferred polymers of the invention have one or more monomer units that contain at least one N-oxide group. At least 10%, preferably more than 50%, more preferably more than 90% of the polymer-forming monomers comprise an amine oxide group. These polymers may be described by the general formula: P (B), wherein each P is selected from homopolymerizable and fused to form preferably a vinyl moiety, copolymerizable moieties that have a polymer backbone, such as C (R)₂-C (R)₂wherein each R is hydrogen, C1-C₁₂ (with benefit

(C 1 -C 4) alkyl (en), C₆-C₁₂aryl (en) or B; B is a moiety selected from substituted and unsubstituted, linear and cyclic

Ci_Ci₂ alkyl, C 1 -C 12 alkylene, C 1 -C 4 heterocycle, aromatic C 1-6 alkyl;₆C_i2 groups and wherein one of said B moieties has at least one amine oxide (-N-&gt; O) group present; u is such a number that provides at least 10% of the monomers containing the group at about 90% and t is such a number, the molecular weight of the polymer is from 2000 to 500,000, preferably from 5000 to 250,000, more preferably from 7500 to 200,000.

amine oxide that average

Preferred polymers that can be used in the cleaning component have the unexpected property of being massive without leaving a visible residue that makes the surface substrate unattractive to the consumer. Preferred polymers include poly (4-vinylpyrrolidone-N-oxide) polymers (PVNO), for example, those formed by polymerizing monomers that include the following moieties:

t

N.

wherein the average molecular weight of the polymer is from 2000 to

500 More preferably from 5,000 to 400,000, more preferably from 7,500 to 400,000

300 In general, higher molecular weight polymers are preferred.

• · · · · · · · · 9

9999 9 9 9 9 9 9 · • ·

999 9

High molecular weight polymers often allow the use of lower levels of wetting polymer, which can provide benefits in floor cleaner applications. The desired molecular weight range of the polymers useful in the present invention is in contrast to the prior art disclosed for polycarboxylate-based polystyrenesulfonate polyether additives which provide molecular weights in the range of 400,000 to 1,500,000. The low molecular weights of the particularly preferred polyamine oxide polymers of the present invention are due to the greater difficulty in producing the higher molecular weight polymers.

The level of amine oxide polymer will normally be less than 0.5%, preferably from 0.005% to 0.4%, even more preferably from 0.01% to 0.3% by weight. mixture or solution for end use.

Some non-limiting examples of homopolymers and copolymers that can be used as the water-soluble polymers of the present invention are: copolymer of adipic acid and epoxypropyldiethylenetriamine, polyvinyl alcohol, copolymer of methacryloylethyl betaine and methacrylates, copolymer of ethyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid and acrylic acid, polyylamine resins and polyquaternary amine resins, poles (ethenylformamide), poles (ethenylformamide) poles (vinyl alcohol-to-12% vinylamine), poles (vinyl alcohol-to-6% vinylamine hydrochloride) and poles (vinyl alcohol-to-12% vinylamine hydrochloride). Preferably said copolymers or homopolymers are selected from the group consisting of copolymers of adipic acid and dimethylaminohydroxypropyldiethylenetriamine, poly (vinylpyrrolidone / dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate), polyvinyl alcohol, copolymer of ethyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid, methacrylic acid, methacrylic acid, methacrylic acid, methacrylic acid and methacrylic acid. polyquaternary amine resins, poles (ethenylformamide), poles (vinylamine) hydrochloride, poles (vinyl alcohol-to-6% vinylamine), poles (vinyl alcohol-to 12% vinylamine hydrochloride).

The polymers useful in the cleaning component of the present invention can be selected from the group consisting of copolymers of hydrophilic monomers. The polymer may be linear random or block copolymers and mixtures thereof. The term hydrophilic is used herein consistent with a standard meaning having affinity for water. As used herein in relation to monomer units and polymeric materials, including copolymers, hydrophilic means substantially water-soluble. In this regard, substantially water-soluble will mean a material that is soluble in distilled (or equivalent) water at 25 ° C at a concentration of about 0.2% by weight. and are preferably soluble at about 1% water. The terms soluble, solubility and the like for this purpose correspond to the maximum concentration of monomer or polymer, as appropriate, that can be dissolved in water or other solvents to form a homogeneous solution as understood by those skilled in the art.

Non-limiting examples of useful hydrophilic monomers are unsaturated organic mono- and polycarboxylic acids such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid and its semi-esters, itaconic acid, unsaturated alcohols such as wine alcohol, allyl alcohol, polar vinyl heterocycles such as vinylcaprolactam , vinylpyridine, vinylimidazole, vinylamine, vinylsulfonate, unsaturated amides such as acrylamides, e.g. N, N-dimethylacrylamide, N-t-butylacrylamide, hydroxyethyl methacrylate, dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate, acid salts and amines listed above and the like, and mixtures thereof. Some preferred hydrophilic monomers are acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, N, N-dimethylacrylamide, N, N-dimethylmethacrylamide, Nt-butyl acrylamide, dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate and mixtures thereof.

Polycarboxylate polymers are those polymers that are formed by polymerizing monomers, at least some of which contain carboxyl functionality. Common monomers include acrylic acid, maleic acid, ethylene, vinylpyrrolidone, methacrylic acid, methacryloylethyl betaine, etc. Particularly preferred polymers for weight are those having a higher molecular weight. For example, polyacrylic acid having a molecular weight below 10,000 is not exactly mass and therefore does not normally ensure hydrophilicity after three wetting of all compositions, although with higher levels or certain surfactants such as amphoteric or zwitteronic detergent surfactants, the molecular weights can be up to down to 1000 giving certain results. In general, polymers should have a molecular weight of more than 10,000, preferably more than 20,000, even more preferably more than 300,000 and even more preferably more than 400,000. It has also been found that higher molecular weight polymers, for example those having weights of more than 3,000,000 are extremely difficult to formulate and are less effective in providing soil protection benefits than low molecular weight polymers. Accordingly, the molecular weight should normally be from 20,000 to 3,000,000, preferably from 20,000 to 2,500,000, more preferably from 300,000 to 2,000,000, even more preferably from 400,000 to 1,500,000, particularly for polyacrylates.

An advantage for some polycarboxylate polymers is the effectiveness of the detergent component in such polymers. Although such polymers interfere with film formation or striation, like other detergent ingredients, they provide enhanced cleaning performance for typical particulate-containing impurities that are difficult to remove.

Some polymers, especially polycarboxylate polymers, thicken mixtures that are aqueous liquids. This may be desirable, but when the compositions are placed in containers with a trigger spray device, the compositions are not desirable as dense as they would require excessive trigger pressure. Shear viscosity should generally be less than about 200 cP (2 dynes / cm)²), preferably less than 100 cP (1 dynes / cm)²), more preferably less than 50 cP (0.5 dyn.s / cm²). However, it may be desirable to have dense compositions to prevent the mixture from flowing to the surface, especially vertical surfaces.

Non-limiting examples of polymers for use in the present invention include the following: vinylpyrrolidone-acrylic acid polymer sold under the name Acrylidone® by ISP and acrylic acid polymer marketed under the name Accumer® by Rohm &amp; Haas. Other suitable materials include sulfonated polystyrene polymers sold under the name Versaflex ® sold by the National Starch and Chemical Company, especially Versaflex 7000.

The level of polymeric material will normally be less than 0.5%, preferably 0.01% to 0.4%, even more preferably from 0.01% to 0.3%. In general, low molecular weight materials, such as low molecular weight polyacrylic acid, such as those having molecular weights below 10,000, and especially around 2000, do not provide good non-staining benefits after rewetting, especially at low levels, such as 0.02%. Only more efficient materials at low levels should be used. In order to use low molecular weight materials, weight should be increased, for example by adding groups that provide improved surface attachment, such as cationic groups, or materials of na 4 * 4 should be used.

4 4

4 4 44

49 94 44

44 4 4 44 4

4 44 4 4 4 higher level, for example more than about 0.05%.

Particularly preferred polymers in the scrubbing component are selected from the group consisting of polystyrene sulfonate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinylpyrrolidone-acrylic acid copolymer, polyvinylpyrrolidone-acrylic acid copolymer sodium, polyvinylpyrrolidone-acrylic acid copolymer, polyvinylpyrrolidone-polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinylpyrrolidone-acrylic acid, polyvinylpyrrolidone and combinations thereof. A particularly preferred polymer is polyvinylpyridine n-oxide.

Another embodiment of the cleaning component comprises an effective amount of a detergent surfactant in place of the polymer described above. Suitable detergent surfactants include those foams described above as suitable for inclusion in the cleansing component.

Particularly preferred surfactants for use in the present invention are the alkyl polysaccharides described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,776,872, 883,059, 5,883,062 and 5,906,973.

Suitable alkylpolysaccharides for use in the present invention are described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,565,647 having a hydrophobic group containing from 6 to 30 carbon atoms, preferably from 10 to 16 carbon atoms, and a polysaccharide, for example a polyglycoside having a hydrophilic group. For acidic or alkaline cleaning compositions or solutions suitable for use in non-rinsing methods, the preferred alkyl polysaccharide preferably includes a wide distribution of chain lengths, such as those that provide the best combination of wetting, cleansing, and low residue after drying. This broad distribution is defined such that at least 50% of the chain length mixture comprises from 10 carbon atoms to 16 carbon atoms. Alkyl • 4 ♦ * 4 * 44 44

4 4 4 4 4444

4444 4444 ·4 4

444 44 444 4 4

444 4444 444

44 The alkyl polysaccharide group is preferably composed of mixtures of chain lengths, preferably of 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably of 8 to 16 carbon atoms, and a hydrophilic group containing from 1 to 1.5 carbohydrate, preferably glucoside groups per molecule. This broad distribution of chain lengths is defined by at least 50% of the chain length mixture, comprising from 10 carbon atoms to 16 carbon atoms.₈ to C₁₆ is highly desirable compared to a narrower range of chain length mixtures and especially to lower (e.g.₈ to Ci₀ or C_{8 to} C₁₂) chain length of alkyl polyglucoside mixtures. It is also found that preferred C₈up to C 16 alkylpolyglucoside provides much better perfume solubility over lower and narrower chain lengths of alkyl polyglucosides, as well as other preferred surfactants, including C₈to C14 alkyl ethoxylates. Any reducing carbohydrate containing 5 or 6 carbon atoms can be used, for example glucose, galactose and galactosyl moieties can be substituted for glucosyl moieties (optionally, the hydrophobic moiety is attached at the 2-, 3-, 4-, etc. positions, giving glucose or galactose versus glucoside or galactoside). The linkages within the saccharides may be, for example, between position one of the other saccharide units and positions 2, 3, 4, or 6 on the preceding saccharide units. The glycosyl is preferably derived from glucose.

Alternatively, and less desirably, there may be a polyalkylene oxide chain linking the hydrophobic moiety and the polysaccharide moiety. A preferred alkylene oxide is ethylene oxide. Typical hydrophobic groups include alkyl groups, either saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched, containing from 8 to 18, preferably from 10 to 16 carbon atoms. The alkyl group is preferably a straight chain saturated alkyl group. The alkyl group may contain up to 3 hydroxyl groups or the polyalkylene oxide chain may contain up to 10, preferably less than 5

4 · ··· 4 alkylene oxide moieties. Suitable alkyl polysaccharides are octyl, nonyldecyl, undecyldodecyl, tridecyl, tetradecyl, pentadecyl, hexadecyl, heptadecyl and octadecyl, di-, tri, tetra-, penta- and hexaglucosides or galactose. Suitable mixtures include coconut oil alkyl, di-, tri-, tetra- and pentaglucosides and tallow alkyl-, penta- and hexaglucosides.

To prepare these compounds, an alcohol or an alkylpolyethoxy alcohol is first formed and then reacted with glucose or a source of glucose to form a glucoside (attachment at position 1). Further glycosyl units can then be attached between their 1-position and the preceding glycosyl units at position 2, 3, 4 or 6, preferably at position 2.

In alkyl polyglycosides, alkyl moieties may be derived from conventional sources such as fats, oils or chemically produced alcohols, while their sugar moieties are formed from hydrolysed polysaccharides. Alkyl polyglycosides are the condensation product of fatty alcohol and sugars such as glucose with a number of glucose units defining relative hydrophilicity. As discussed above, the sugar units may additionally be alkoxylated either before or after reaction with fatty alcohols. Such alkyl polyglycosides are described in detail, for example, in WO 86/05199. Technical alkyl polyglycosides are generally non-molecular products, but are mixtures of alkyl groups and mixtures of monosaccharides and various oligosaccharides. Alkyl polyglycosides (sometimes also referred to as APGs) are preferred for the purposes of the invention as they provide a further improvement in surface appearance over other surfactants. The glycoside moieties are preferably glucose moieties. The alkyl substituent is preferably a saturated or unsaturated alkyl moiety containing from 8 to 18 carbon atoms, having an alkyl moiety of from about 8 to about 18 carbon atoms.

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

9 9 99 9 9 99 9 9 9 • · · 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 99 99 99 9999 preferably from 8 to 10 carbon atoms or a mixture of such alkyl moieties. C₈ to Ci₆ alkyl polyglycosides are commercially available, for example, as Simusol® detergents from Seppic Corporation, 75 Quai d'Orsay, 75321 Paris, Cedex 7, France, and as Glucopon® 425 available from Henkel. However, it has been found that the purity of an alkyl polyglucoside may also affect functionality, particularly the end result for certain applications, including daytime shower product technology. In the present invention, preferred alkyl polyglucosides are those which have been sufficiently purified for use in personal cleansing. Most preferred are cosmetic types of alkyl polyglucosides, especially C₈ to C 18 alkyl polyglucosides such as Plantaren 2000 ®, Plantaren 2000 N ® and Plantaren N UP ®, which are available from Henkel Corporation (Postfach 101100, D 40191 Dusseldorf, Germany). Such detergents would thus also be advantageous for use in the cleaning component when the article is used for personal care applications.

In the context of applications to floors, kitchen countertops, walls, etc., another class of preferred nonionic surfactants are alkyl ethoxylates. The alkyl ethoxylates of the present invention are either linear or branched and contain from 8 carbon atoms to 14 carbon atoms and from 4 ethylene oxide units to 25 ethylene oxide units. Examples of alkyl ethoxylates include Neodol® 91-6, Neodol 91-8® supplied by Shell Corporation (PO Box 2463, 1 Shell Plaza,

Houston, Texas), and Alfonic® 810-60 supplied by Vista Corporation, (900 Threadneedle PO Box 19029, Houston, TX, USA). More preferred surfactants are alkyl ethoxylates of carbon atoms and from 4 to 8 These surfactants comprising from 9 to 12 ethylene oxide units.

They offer excellent cleaning benefits and work synergistically with the desired hydrophilic polymers. The most preferred alkyl ethoxylate is C11EO5, available from Shell Chemical Company under the trademark Neodol® 1-5. This surfactant provides desirable moisturizing and cleansing properties and can be advantageously combined with preferred C₈ to C₁₆ an alkylpolyglucoside in a matrix comprising the humectant polymers of the present invention. Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that C₈ up to C 16 alkylpolyg lucoside can provide excellent end result (ie reduced haze) in compositions that additionally contain a preferred alkyl ethoxylate, especially when a preferred alkyl ethoxylate is required for excellent purification. It has been found that preferred C₈ The alkyl to polyglucoside also improves the solubility of the perfume compositions comprising alkyl ethoxylates. Higher levels of perfume can be beneficial by being more accepted by customers.

More preferred detergent surfactants are selected from the group consisting of alkyl polysaccharide detergents having an alkyl group containing from 8 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably from 8 to 16 carbon atoms, and from one to four, preferably from one to 1.5 carbohydrate moieties per molecule or a combination consisting of alkyl polysaccharide detergent surfactants having an alkyl group containing from 8 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably from 8 to 16 carbon atoms and from 1 to 4, preferably from 1 to 1.5 carbohydrate moieties per molecule together with an alkyl ethoxylate comprising from 8 to 16 carbon atoms and from 4 to 25 oxyethylene units, and combinations thereof.

The cleaning components are prepared with relatively low levels of active ingredients. These compositions generally include sufficient surfactant and optional solvent, as discussed below, which are effective as detergent compositions. 9 9 9 9 9 9 99 99 9 9 99 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 999 9 999 9 99 99 9999 on hard surfaces, but remain economical. Therefore, they generally contain from 0.005% to 0.5% by weight. a surfactant mixture, preferably an alkylpolyglycoside and / or C₈ to C_i4 an alkyl ethoxylate surfactant, more preferably from 0.01% to 0.4% surfactant, and even more preferably from 0.01% to 0.3% surfactant. It has been found that the use of low rather than high levels of surfactant is advantageous in terms of overall end results. It has also been found that when the primary surfactant system comprises preferred alkyl ethoxylates, the resulting haze is alleviated by specific surfactant aids. Preferred co-surfactants are C₈sulfonate and Poly-Tergent CS-1.

In the field of household care, the products of the present invention may be particularly useful. For example, the articles can be used for cleaning in a dryer or for reviving clothes-type articles when placed inside a bag along with such a garment, where the bag is then placed in the dryer. In this context, the articles of the present invention may be either substantially dry or substantially wet. The articles of the present invention suitable for cleaning in a dryer include preferably water and a member selected from the group consisting of surfactants, perfumes, preservatives, bleaches, cleaning aids, organic solvents and mixtures thereof. Preferred organic solvents are glycol ethers, in particular methoxypropoxypropanol, ethoxypropoxypropanol, propoxypropoxypropanol, butoxypropoxypropanol, butoxypropanol and mixtures thereof. The surfactant is preferably a nonionic surfactant such as an ethoxylated alcohol or an ethoxylated alkylphenol and is present in an amount of up to 2% by weight. from the cleaning / refreshing mixture. Typical cleaning ingredients suitable for fabric cleaning may include at least 80 wt. water, preferably at least 90% and more preferably at least 95% water.

Suitable organic solvents, surfactants, perfumes, preservatives, bleaches and cleaning aids which may be included in the cleaning component of the present invention can be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,789,368 and 5,591,236. No. 789,171 discloses other compositions which would be suitable cleaning ingredients.

In the context of the purification or recovery of the substances, it is preferred that the cleaning component of the invention comprises a precipitation reducing composition which is preferably selected from the group consisting of ethylene glycol, all isomers of propanediol, butanediol, pentanediol, hexanediol and mixtures thereof, and preferably selected from a group consisting of neopentyl glycol, polyethylene glycol, 1,2-propanediol, 1,3-butanediol, 1-octanol, and mixtures thereof. The precipitation reducing composition is preferably neopentyl glycol or 1,2-propanediol, and more preferably 1,2-propanediol. The ratio of the shrinkage reducing composition to the cleaning component is preferably from 1: 2 to 1: 5, more preferably from 1: 2 to 1: 4, even more preferably from 1: 3 to 1: 4, and most preferably 1: 3.6.

In addition to the above ingredients, the cleaning component may optionally include a bleaching agent, preferably hydrogen peroxide.

Dust Polishing and Wiping Component:

A preferred component for the products just described may be a component for polishing and dusting. The polishing and dusting performance of the articles of the present invention can be further enhanced by treating the sheet fibers, especially the surface treatment, with a polishing and dusting component, which increases the adhesion of the impurities to the article. When used, these polishing and dusting ingredients are added to the article to a degree sufficient to increase the ability of the article to adhere to it, but the amount and type of additive must be selected to minimize the amount of residue left on the surface should be cleaned or dusted so that the surface is visually acceptable to the consumer. Such additives are preferably applied to the article by addition in a concentration of at least 0.01%, more preferably at least 0.1%, even more preferably at least 0.5%, even more preferably at least 1%, even more preferably at least 3%, even more preferably at least 4%. % wt. The addition rate is generally from 0.1 to 25%, even more preferably from 0.5 to 20%, even more preferably from 1 to 15%, even more preferably from 2 to 10%, even more preferably from 4 to 8%, and most preferably from 4 to 8%. 6 wt. product.

A preferred dust polishing and wiping component comprises a material selected from the group consisting of wax, oil and combinations thereof. Suitable waxes include various types of hydrocarbons as well as esters of certain fatty acids (e.g. saturated triglycerides) and fatty alcohols. They may be derived from natural sources (i.e., animal, plant or mineral) or may be synthesized. Mixtures of these various waxes can also be used. Some representatives of animal and vegetable waxes that can be used in the present invention include beeswax, carnauba wax, spermaceti, lanolin, shellac wax, candelilla wax and the like. Representative waxes from mineral sources useful in the present invention include petroleum based waxes such as paraffin, petrolatum and microcrystalline wax, and fossil or earth waxes such as white ceresin wax, yellow ceresin wax, white ozokerite wax and the like. . Representative synthetic waxes that can be used in the present invention include ethylene polymers such as polyethylene wax, chlorinated naphthalenes such as Halowax,

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0006.tif" />

hydrocarbon waxes produced by Fischer-Tropsch synthesis and the like. Other preferred dust cleaning and wiping ingredients are supplied as a mixture of wax and oil, such as petrolatum.

A preferred dust polishing and wiping component comprises a mixture of wax and mineral oil that enhances the ability of the article to pick up and retain particulate material from the surfaces while minimizing the amount of residue left on the surface to be wiped with the article. When using a mineral oil-wax mixture, the components will preferably be mixed in an oil to wax ratio of from 1:99 to 7: 3, more preferably from 1:99 to 3: 2, even more preferably from 1:99 to 2: 3 by weight. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the ratio of oil to wax is 1: 1 by weight and the additive is applied based on an addition of 5% by weight. A preferred polishing and dusting component is a 1: 1 mixture of mineral oil and paraffin wax.

The wax itself, such as paraffin wax, can be used as a component for polishing and dusting the articles. Where the wax is the only component for polishing and dusting, the articles are preferably made of synthetic fibers, so that the article is still able to maintain electrostatic properties to provide increased scooping and retention of particulate material. In any case, if the laminate web of the article comprises natural or synthetic fibers, a dust polishing and wiping component containing substantially wax is applied to the laminate web as an addition in a concentration of not more than 4%, preferably not more than 3%, yet more preferably not more than 2% and even more preferably not more than 1% by weight. per product weight. These levels are preferably levels because when the wax is applied to the laminate strip at a higher level, the electrostatic properties of the article will generally be reduced and thus the overall performance of the article in terms of polishing and dusting will be reduced.

• 9

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0007.tif" />

The mineral oil itself can also be used as a component for polishing and dusting products. The dust polishing and wiping component consisting essentially of mineral oil is generally used on the laminate web as an addition of not more than 4%, preferably not more than 3%, more preferably not more than 2% and most preferably 1% by weight. product.

These low levels are particularly desirable when additives are applied at an effective concentration and preferably in a substantially uniform manner over at least one discrete continuous region of the article. The use of advantageous lower levels, in particular of the polishing and dusting component, which improves the adherence of dirt to the product provides suppression of airborne dust, consumer perceptions, especially touch sensations, and in addition, the polishing and dusting component can provide a means of incorporating and attaching perfumes, components for controlling pests, antimicrobials, including fungicides, and having a number of other preferred ingredients therein, particularly those that are soluble or dispersible in the additive. These benefits are exemplary only.

The polishing and dusting component advantageously does not significantly alter the electrostatic properties of the product when used for polishing or dust removal. It is preferred that the article of the present invention has electrostatic properties when used in this context in order to facilitate scooping and retention of particulate material, particularly for fine particulate particulate material.

The polishing and dusting component can be applied to the articles in a number of ways. These methods include manual roller application, mechanical roller application, longitudinal slot application, ultrasonic spraying, pressure spraying, pump spraying, dipping, and the like.

A preferred method of applying the polishing and dusting component to the

<td>product</td><td>Yippee</td><td>spraying</td><td>ultrasound. Component</td><td>polishing a</td><td>wiping</td>

<td>of dust</td><td>Yippee</td><td>with an advantage</td><td>applied evenly</td><td colspan="2">for laminate strip</td>

<td>product.</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Next</td><td colspan="2">preferred method</td><td>applying the component to</td><td>polishing a</td><td>wiping</td>

<td>of dust</td><td>on</td><td>the product is</td><td colspan="2">by mechanical roller application.</td><td>During</td>

In the manufacture of articles, these articles are fed through a set of rollers that are covered with a polishing and dusting component to be applied. The rollers may be covered by the polishing and dusting component by rotation in a pan or container containing the component. As the products are fed through the rollers, the component is transferred from the rollers to the products. When the polishing and dusting component is a mixture of wax and mineral oil, especially in a ratio of wax to mineral oil of 1: 1, the pan or container containing the polishing and dusting component is preferably heated to a temperature of from 32 ° C to 98 ° C, preferably from 40 ° C to 65 ° C to keep the polishing and dusting component in a liquid state. In such a situation, the rollers are also preferably heated to a temperature similar to that of the hot component in the liquid state. The temperature of the mixture of components and rollers is generally maintained at at least 5 ° C to 10 ° C higher than the melting point of the mixture of components.

To produce the subject articles on a small scale, the component can also be applied to the product by hand roller coating, which includes taking the hand roller, covering the component, and rolling the component onto the surface of the article.

Methodology of moisture retention measurement:

As described above, in some cases the products of the present invention are considered to be substantially dry. As used herein, the term substantially dry means that the articles of the present invention exhibit a moisture retention of less than 0.95 g / m 2², preferably less than 0.75 g / m 2²even more preferably less than 0.5 g / m 2²even more preferably less than 0.25 g / m 2²even more preferably less than 0.15 g / m 2² and most preferably less than 0.1 g / m 2². The moisture retention indicates how dry the users feel when they touch certain articles of the present invention as compared to the moisture feel of wet products.

On the other hand, there are articles of the present invention that are substantially wet. As used herein, the term &amp; quot; substantially wet &amp; quot; means that the consumer is perceived to be wet when touched. This means that the products have a moisture retention greater than 0.95 g / m².

In order to determine the moisture retention of the subject articles and other substrate disposable articles, the following devices and materials are required:

Bounty Procter &amp; Gamble Wipes SKU 37000 63037 white paper

The basis weight is 42.14 g / m²

Balance Accuracy to 0,0 g

Lexan Thickness 0.5

Large enough to completely cover samples and weights of 1000 g

Weights 2000 g weights or a combination equal to 2000 g

Then weigh two paper towels separately and record each weight. One paper napkin is placed on a flat surface (for example, a lab table). A sample of the product is placed on this napkin. A second paper napkin is placed on a sample of the article. Then Lexan is placed on it and then 2000 g of weight on the product sample layers. Wait 1 minute. After 1 minute, weights and Lexan are removed. Weigh the top and bottom paper tissues and record their weight.

The moisture retention is calculated by subtracting the initial weight of the paper towels from their final weight (after 1 minute) for both the top and bottom paper towels. The weight differences obtained for the upper and lower wipes are added together. Assuming multiple products are tested, the overall weight differences are averaged to obtain moisture retention.

Optional ingredients suitable for addition to the personal care articles of the present invention:

Products of the present invention that are suitable for personal hygiene applications may contain a variety of other ingredients commonly used in a given type of article, provided that they do not unacceptably alter the advantages of the invention. These optional ingredients should be suitable for application to human skin and hair, e.g. when incorporated into a product, they are suitable for use in contact with human skin without undesirable toxicity, incompatibility, instability, allergic response and the like to the extent of the mature judgment of the physician or the recipe of the formulator. CTFA Cosmetic Ingredient Handbook, Second Edition (1992) describes a wide variety of non-limiting cosmetic and pharmaceutical ingredients that are commonly used in the skin care industry and are suitable for use in the products of the present invention.

In the field of personal hygiene, examples of suitable classes of optional ingredients include enzymes, abrasives, astringents etc. astringents etc. camphor, eucalyptus from witch throwing shells), skin, menthol, peeling distillate skin, absorbents, aesthetic components such as fragrances, pigments, dyes, essential oils, sensory enhancers (e.g., clove oil, oil, eugenol, menthyl lactate, anti-acne agents (e.g.

resorcinol, sulfur, salicylic acid, erythromycin, zinc, etc.), - anti-sticking agents, anti-foaming agents, other antimicrobial agents (e.g. iodoprylbutylcarbamate), antioxidants, binders, biological additives, buffering agents, bulking agents, chelating agents, chemical additives, dyes, cosmetic astringents, cosmetic biocides, denaturing drug astringents, external analgesics, film-forming substances or materials, for example polymers and film-forming properties the weight of the composition (e.g. eicosene-vinylpyrrolidone copolymer), moisture stabilizers, opacifying agents, pH adjusters, propellants, reducing agents, sequestrants, skin whitening agents (or lightening agents) (e.g., hydroquinone, kojic acid, ascorbic acid, magnesium ascorbyl phosphate, ascorbylglucosamine), skin soothing and / or treating agents (e.g. panthenol and derivatives (e.g. ethylpanthenol), aloe vera, pantothenic acid and its derivatives, allantoin, bisabolol and potassium glycyrrhizinate), skin treatment agents, including agents to prevent, delay the formation, retard the formation or removal of wrinkles in the skin (eg, alpha-hydroxy acids such as lactic acid and glycolic acid and beta-hydroxy acids such as salicylic acid), thickeners, hydrocolloids, particulate zeolites and vitamins and derivatives thereof (e.g. tocopherol, tocopherolsorbate, tocopherol acetate, betacarotene, retinoic acid, retinol, retinoids, retinyl palmitate, niacin, niacinamide and the like.) The products of the present invention may include carrier components such as

99 99 99 99 99

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

9 9 99 9 9 99 9 9 · are known in the art. Such carriers may include one or more compatible liquid or solid filler diluents or carriers that are suitable for application to the skin or hair.

The articles of the present invention may optionally contain one or more such optional ingredients. The preferred products of the present invention that are suitable for treating a person optionally comprise a safe and effective amount of a therapeutically beneficial component comprising a therapeutically beneficial agent selected from the group consisting of vitamin substances, skin modifying agents, anti-acne agents, anti-wrinkle agents, anti-atrophy agents skin, anti-inflammatory agents, surface anesthetics, artificial tanning agents and tanning accelerators, antimicrobial active agents, antifungal, sunscreen, antioxidant, skin peeling agents and combinations thereof. As used herein, the term safe and effective amount means an amount of a compound or component sufficient to produce a significant effect or benefit, but small enough to prevent serious side effects (e.g., undesirable toxicity or allergic reactions), i.e., a severe or adverse effect. to ensure a reasonable balance between benefit and profit to the extent of sound medical judgment.

The optional ingredients useful herein may be categorized by their therapeutic or aesthetic advantage or by the postulated mode of action, but it is believed that the optional ingredients useful herein may in some cases provide more than one therapeutic or aesthetic advantage or work through more than one mode of action. . Thus, classification is made here because it is convenient and is not intended to limit the component to

4« 44 44 44 4« 44

4*4 4 · · 4 &lt;4*4

4 444 4 4 44 4 · 4

44 444 4 4 444 4 4 specific application or applications. Also, where appropriate, pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the components may be used.

Vitamin Compounds:

The articles of manufacture may include vitamin compounds, precursors and derivatives thereof. These vitamin compounds may be in either natural or synthetic form. Suitable vitamin compounds include, but are not limited to, vitamin A compounds (e.g., beta-carotene, retinoic acid, retinol, retinoids, retinyl palmitate, retinyl propionate, etc.), vitamin B (e.g., niacin, niacinamide, riboflavin, pantothenic acid, etc.), vitamin C (e.g., ascorbic acid, etc.), vitamin D (e.g. ergosterol, ergocalciferol, cholecalciferol etc.), vitamin E (eg tocopherol acetate) and vitamin K (eg phytonadione, menadione, phthiocol etc.).

In particular, the products of the present invention may comprise a safe and effective amount of a vitamin B compound₃. Vitamin B compounds₃ are particularly useful for regulating the condition of the skin as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08 / 834,010 corresponding to WO 97/39733 A1. The therapeutic component of the present invention preferably comprises from 0.01% to 50%, more preferably from 0.1% to 10%, even more preferably from 0.5% to 10% and even more preferably from 1% to 5%, most preferably from 2% to 5 of the vitamin B compound₃.

Vitamin B compound₃, as used herein, means a compound having the formula:

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0008.tif" />

wherein R is -CONH 2 (ie niacinamide), -COOH (ie nicotinic acid) or -CH₂OH (i.e., nicotinyl alcohol), derivatives and salts thereof.

Exemplary derivatives of the previous vitamin B compounds₃ include esters of nicotinic acid, including non-vasodilatory esters of nicotinic acid, nicotinylamino acids, nicotinyl alcohol esters of carboxylic acids, nicotinic acid N-oxide and niacinamide N-oxide.

Examples of suitable vitamin B compounds₃ are well known in the art and are commercially available from a variety of sources, eg, from Sigma Chemical Company (St. Louis, MO, USA); ICN Biomedicals, Inc. (Irvin, CA, USA) and the Aldrich Chemical Company (Milwaukee, WI, USA).

The vitamin compounds may be included as a substantially pure material or as an extract obtained by suitable physical or chemical isolation from natural (eg, plant) sources.

Skin care agents:

The articles of the present invention may comprise one or more skin care agents. Suitable skin care agents include those agents that are effective to prevent, slow, stop or remove wrinkles of the skin. Examples of suitable skin care agents include, but are not limited to, alpha-hydroxy acids such as lactic acid and glycolic acid, and beta-hydroxy acids such as salicylic acid.

·· 99 ·9 99 99 99

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 • 9 999 9 9 99 9 9 ·

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

99 99 99 99 9999

Active anti-acne agents:

Examples of suitable anti-acne activities on the products of the present invention include, but are not limited to, keratolytic agents such as salicylic acid (ohydroxybenzoic acid), salicylic acid derivatives such as 5-octanoylsalicylic acid and resorcinol; retinoids such as retinoic acid and derivatives thereof (e.g. cis and trans); sulfur containing D and L amino acids and their derivatives and salts, especially their N-acetylderivatives, preferred examples of which are Nacetyl-L-cysteine, lipoic acid, antibiotics and antimicrobials such as benzoyl peroxide, octopirox, tetracycline, 2,4,4 ' -trichloro-2¹hydroxydiphenyl ether, 3,4,4'-trichlorobanilide, azealic acid and its derivatives, phenoxyethanol, phenoxypropanol, phenoxyisopropanol, ethyl acetate, clindamycin and meclocycline, sebostats such as flavonoids and white salts such as skymolsulfate and derivatives thereof, deoxycholate and cholate.

Anti-wrinkle and skin atrophy substances:

Examples of anti-wrinkle and skin atrophy active agents useful in the products of the present invention include, but are not limited to, retinoic acid and derivatives thereof (e.g., cis and trans), retinol, retinyl esters, niacinamide, salicylic acid and derivatives thereof, sulfur containing D and L-amino acids and derivatives and salts thereof, especially N-acetylderivatives, preferred examples of which are N-acetyl-L-cysteine, thiols such as ethanethiol, terpene alcohols (e.g. farnesol), hydroxyacids, phytic acid, lipoic acid, lysophosphatidic acid, and skin peeling agents (e.g., phenol and the like).

• 0 • *4 • · 444

0 0

0 0

0« 00 4 4 4 0

0 ·

0«

0 0

0000

Non-steroidal anti-inflammatory active substances:

Examples of non-steroidal anti-inflammatory active agents useful in the products of the present invention include, but are not limited to, the following categories: propionic acid derivatives, acetic acid derivatives, phenamic acid derivatives, biphenylcarboxylic acid derivatives and oxicams.

All of these non-steroidal anti-inflammatory actives are fully described in U.S. Patent 4,985,459. Examples of non-steroidal anti-inflammatory actives include acetylsalicylic acid, ibuprofen, naproxen, benoxaprofen, flurbiprofen, phenoprofen, fenbufen, ketoprofen, indoprofen, oxprofen, carprofen, pirprofen, carprofen, pirprofen, carprofen, carprofen, carprofen, , thioxaprofen, suprofen, alminoprofen, tiaprofenic acid, fluprofen and buccloxic acid. Also useful are steroidal anti-inflammatory agents, including hydrocortisone and the like.

Anesthetics for topical use:

Examples of surfactant anesthetics which are useful in the products of the present invention include, but are not limited to, benzocaine, lidocaine, bupivacaine, chloroprocaine, dibucaine, etidocaine, mepivacaine, tetracaine, dyclonine, hexylcaine, procaine, cocaine, ketamine, pramoxin, phenol, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

Artificial tanning substances and tanning accelerators:

Examples of artificial tanning agents and tanning accelerators applicable to the products of the present invention include, but are not limited to, dihydroxyacetaone, tyrosine, tyrosine esters such as ethyl tyrosinate and phospho-DOPA.

Antimicrobial and antifungal agents:

44 • »4

4 4 ·«

4 4 · • 4 4 ·

44

4« »4 44 44

4 4 4 4 4 4

44 44 4

4 4 4 4 · 4

4 4 4 *4

4« 44 44 *44*

Examples of antimicrobial and antifungal active agents useful in the products of the present invention include, but are not limited to, β-lactam, quinolone, ciprofloxacin, norfloxacin, tetracycline, erythromycin, amikacin, 2,4,4'-trichloro-2'-hydroxydiphenylether 3,4,4'-trichlorocarbanilide, phenoxyethanol, phenoxypropanol, phenoxyisopropanol, doxycylelin, capreomycin, chlorhexidine, chlortetracycline, oxytetracycline, clindamycin, ethambutol, hexamidine isethionate, metronidazole, pentamidine, gentamicin, kanamycin, lineomycin, methacycline, methenamine, minocycline, neomycin, netilmicin, paromomycin, streptomycin, tobramycin, miconazole, tetracycline hydrochloride, erythromycin, zinc erythromycin, erythromycin stearate, amikacin sulfate, doxycycline, kapreomycinsulfát, chlorhexidine gluconate, chlorhexidinhydrochlorid, chlortetracyklinhydrochlorid , oxytetracycline hydrochloride, clindamycin hydrochloride, ethambutol hydrochloride, metronidazolhydrochlorid, pentamidinhydrochlorid, gentamycin, kanamycin sulfate, lineomycinhydrochlorid, methacyklinhydrochlorid, methenaminhippurát, methenaminmandelát, minocycline hydrochloride, neomycin, netilmicinsulfát, paromomycinsulfát, streptomycin sulfate, tobramycin, miconazole, amanfadinhydrochlorid, amanfadinsulfát, octopirox, parachlorometa, nystatin, tolnaftate, zinc pyrithione and clotrimazole.

Antiviral active substances:

The products of the present invention may further comprise one or more antiviral active ingredients. Suitable antiviral agents include, but are not limited to, metal salts (e.g., silver nitrate, copper sulfate, iron chloride, etc.) and organic acids (e.g., malic acid, φφφφφ ·φφφφφφφφφφφφφφφφφφφφφ β φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal sal In particular, compositions containing other suitable antiviral active agents include those described in US Patent Applications US 09/421 084, US 09/421 131, US 09/420 646 and US 09/421 179.

Enzymes:

The article of the invention may optionally contain one or more enzymes. Such enzymes are preferably dermatilogically acceptable. Suitable enzymes include, but are not limited to, keratinase, protease, amylase, subtilisin, other peptides, etc.

Peptides, including but not limited to di-, tri-, tetra- and pentapeptides and derivatives thereof, may be included in the components of the present invention in amounts that are safe and effective. As used herein, peptides refer to both naturally occurring peptides and synthesized peptides. Naturally occurring and commercially available compositions containing peptides are also useful herein.

Suitable dipeptides useful herein include carnosine (beta-alahis). Suitable tripeptides include gly-his-lys, arg-lys-arg, his-gly-gly. Preferred tripeptides and derivatives thereof include palmitoyl-gly-his-lys, which can be purchased as Biopeptide C1 (100 ppm (mg / kg) palmitoyl-gly-his-lys, commercially available from Sederma, France); peptide CK (arg-lysarg); Peptide CK + (ac-arg-lys-arg-NH₂and copper derivatives from his.gly.gly, sold commercially as lamin, from Sigma (St. Luis, Missouri, USA). Suitable tetrapeptides useful herein include Peptide E, arg-ser-arg-lys (SEQ ID NO: 1). Suitable pentapeptides useful herein include lys-thr-thr-lys-ser. A preferred commercially available mixture of the pentapeptide derivative is Matrixyl®, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9 and 9, respectively. 9 9 9 9 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

99 99 99 99 9999 which contains 100 ppm (mg / kg) palmitoyl-lys-thr-lys-ser (SEQ ID NO.

NO: 2, commercially available from Sederma, France).

The peptide is preferably selected from palmitoyl-lysthr-thr-lys-ser, palmitoyl-gly-his-lys, beta-ala-his, derivatives and combinations thereof. More preferably, the peptide is selected from palmitoyl-lys-thr-thr-lys-ser, palmitoyl-gly-his-lys, derivatives and combinations thereof. Even more preferably, the peptide is selected from palmitoyl-lys-thr-thr-lys-ser and derivatives thereof.

When used in the present invention, the peptides are preferably included at concentrations from 1x10⁶ % to 10%, more preferably from 1x10^-6 % to 0.1%, more preferably from 1x10^-5 % to 0.01 wt. folders. In some components, wherein the peptide is carnosine®, the components preferably comprise from 0.1% to 5% by weight. components of these peptides. In other embodiments, where a peptide comprising Matrixyl ® or Biopeptide C1 ® components are included, the components preferably comprise from 0.1% to 10% by weight. components, mixtures containing the Matrixyl® peptide or the Biopeptide CL®.

Substances active as sunscreen filters:

Substances active as sunscreen filters can also be used here. A wide variety of sunscreen filters are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,087,445, 5,073,372, 5,073,371, and Segarin et al., Cosmetics Science and Technology, Chapter VIII, pp. 189 et seq. . Non-limiting examples of sunscreen active agents useful in the compositions of the present invention are those selected from the group consisting of 2-ethylhexyl-p-methoxycinnamate, 2-ethylhexyl-N, N-dimethyl-p-aminobenzoate, p-aminobenzoic acid, 2-phenylbenzimidazole-5-sulfonic acid, octocrylene, fcfc fcfc fcfc fcfc fcfc fcfc • • fcfc fcfcfcfc fcfcfcfc fcfcfcfc fcfcfcfc fcfc fc fc fcfc fcfc »fcfc fcfcfc fc fc fcfcfcfc fcfcfcfc fcfcfc • fc fcfc fcfc fcfc fcfcfcfc ·· oxybenzone, homomenthyl salicylate, octyl salicylate, 4,4'-methoxy-tbutyldibenzoylmethan 4 -isopropyldibenzoylmethane, 3-benzylidenefrene, 3- (4-methylbenzylidene) camphor, titanium dioxide, zinc oxide, silica, iron oxide and mixtures thereof. Still other substances active as sunscreen filters are those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,937,370 and 4,999,186. Particularly preferred examples of such sunscreen active agents are those selected from the group consisting of 4-N, N- (2-ethylhexyl) methylaminobenzoic acid ester with 2,4-dihydroxybenzophenone, 4-N, N- (2- ethylhexyl) methylaminobenzoic acid with 4-hydroxydibenzoylmethane, 4-N, N- (2-ethylhexyl) -methylaminobenzoic acid ester with 2-hydroxy-4- (2-hydroxyethoxy) benzophenone, 4-N, N- (2-ethylhexyl) -methylaminobenzoic acid ester with 4- (2-hydroxyethoxy) dibenzoylmethane and mixtures thereof. The exact amount of sunscreen active that can be used will depend on the sunscreen active and the Sun Protection Factor (SPF) selected. The sun protection factor is a commonly used measure of photo-protection by a substance active as a sunscreen against redness of the skin (erythema). See Federal Register, Volume 43, No. 166, pp. 38206-38269, Aug. 25, 1978.

Hydrocolloids:

Hydrocolloids may also optionally be included in the articles of the present invention. Hydrocolloids are well known in the art and assist in extending the useful life of the surfactants included in the cleaning component of the present invention so that the articles can withstand at least one showering or bathing. Suitable hydrocolloids include

9 9 4 9 9 • 4 4 99 4 9 99

4« 444 44

4 9 4 4 *4

44 «4 44 «9 «9

9 9

4

4 4 * 44 4 4 without limitation, xanthan gum, carboxymethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, methyl and ethylcellulose, natural gums, gudras guar gum, tear gum, natural starches, deionized starches (eg, starch octenyl succinate) and the like .

Exothermic zeolites:

Zeolites and other compounds which react exothermically when combined with water may also optionally be included in the products of the present invention.

Oil-soluble polymeric gelling agents:

The articles of the present invention preferably comprise one or more oil-soluble polymeric materials and form a gel with hydrophobic materials (eg, oils) of the therapeutically preferred component. Such polymers are useful for structuring these materials resulting in flexible gels with improved stability and shear resistance.

When a hydrophobic gel is present, the products preferably comprise from 0.05% to 100% by weight. more preferably from 0.1% to 20%, and most preferably from 1% to 10%, of an oil-soluble polymeric gelling agent, based on the dry weight of the polymeric gelling agent.

Particularly suitable are at least partially crosslinked oil-soluble polymeric materials having a softening point of less than 160 ° C. Suitable materials are derived from the chemical groups of polyethylenes (PE), polyvinyl alcohols (PVA) and derivatives, polyvinylpyrrolidones (PVP) and derivatives, copolymers of PVP and alkenes, copolymers of PVP and VA, copolymers of PVM and MA (methyl vinyl ether and maleic anhydride and their esters and ethers) poles (alkyl vinyl ether) * 4 94 44 * · 4 »··« 44 4 4 4 4 4 4 ··

4 9 49 · · ·· · · * • ·« · · · »4 · * · 4 4

4444 4444 449

44 4? 44 44 4444 maleic anhydride copolymers, ethylene-VA copolymers, styrene-isoprene copolymers, styrene-ethylene-butylene copolymers, styrene-ethylene-propylene copolymers, styrene-ethylene-butylene-styrene copolymers, and styrene-butadiene copolymers. Suitable materials are available, for example, from Dupont (ELVAX® types) BASF (LUVISKOL® types), SHELL (KRATON® polymers) and ISP (GANTREZ® and GANEX® PVP types).

Hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agents:

In certain embodiments of the present invention, the articles may optionally comprise an aqueous gel, i.e., a hydrogel formed from a hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agent and water. More specifically, the hydrogel is contained in a cleaning component or a therapeutically preferred component of the article. When an aqueous gel is present, the articles preferably comprise from 0.1% to 100% by weight. % water-insoluble substrate, more preferably from 3% to 50% and most preferably from 5% to 35% of the hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agent, calculated on the dry weight of the hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agent.

Generally, the hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agents of the present invention are at least partially crosslinked polymers prepared from polymerizable unsaturated acid-containing monomers that are water soluble or become water soluble after hydrolysis. They include monoethylenically unsaturated compounds having at least one hydrophilic radical, including, but not limited to, olefinically unsaturated acids and anhydrides containing at least one olefinic carbon-carbon double bond. With respect to these monomers, water-soluble means that the monomer is soluble in deionized water at 25 ° C at a concentration of at least 0.2%, preferably at least 1.0%.

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0009.tif" />

After polymerization, the monomer units as described above will generally comprise from 25 mole percent to 99.99 mole percent, more preferably from 50 mole percent to 99.99 mole percent, most preferably at least 75 mole percent polymeric gelling agent (based on polymer solids) ) of acid-containing monomers.

Here, the hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agent is partially crosslinked to an extent sufficient to ensure that the resulting polymer does not exhibit a glass transition temperature (T)._G) below 140 ° C and accordingly the term hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agent as used herein will mean polymers that meet this parameter. The hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agent preferably does not have a T_G below 180 ° C, and more preferably has no T_G before decomposition of the polymer at temperatures of 300 ° C or higher. T_G differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) performed at a heating rate of 20.0 ° C / minute with samples of 5 mg or less can be determined. Tg is calculated as the midpoint between the start and end of the heat flow change corresponding to the glass transition on the DSC heat capacity heating curve. Use of DSC to determine T_G is well known in the art and described by B. Cassel and MPDiVito in Use of DSC to Obtain Accurate Thermodynamic and Kinetic Data, American Laboratory, January 1994, pp. 14-19, and B. Wunderlich in Thermal Analysis, Academic Press, Inc. 1990.

The hydrogel-forming polymeric material is characterized as highly absorbent and capable of retaining water in the absorbed or gel state. The preferred hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agent will be able to absorb at least 40 g. Water (deionized) per gram of gelling agent, preferably at least 60 g / g, more preferably at least 80 g /G. These values ​​referred to herein as absorption capacity can be determined according to the procedure in the tea bag absorption capacity test described above.

The hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agent of the present invention will generally be at least partially crosslinked. Suitable crosslinking agents are well known in the art and include, for example, (1) compounds having at least two polymerizable double bonds;

(2) compounds having at least one polymerizable double bond and at least one functional group reactive with an acid-containing monomeric material; (3) compounds having at least two functional groups reactive with an acid-containing monomeric material; and (4) polyvalent metal compounds that can form ionic crosslinks.

Crosslinkers having at least two polymerizable double bonds include (1) divinyl or polyvinyl compounds such as divinylbenzene and divinytoluene; (2) diesters or polyesters of unsaturated mono- or polycarboxylic acids with polyols, including for example esters of diacrylic or triacrylic acid and polyols, such as ethylene glycol, trimethylolpropane, glycerin or polyoxyethylene glycols; (3) bisacrylamides such as N, N-methylenebisacrylamide; (4) carbamyl esters, which may be obtained by reacting polyisocyanates with hydroxyl-containing monomers; (5) diallyl or polyallyl ethers of polyols; (6) diallyl or polyallyl esters of polycarboxylic acids such as diallyl phthalate, diallyl adipate and the like; (7) esters of unsaturated mono- or polycarboxylic acids with monoallyl esters of polyols, such as an ester of acrylic acid and polyethylene glycol monoallyl ether; and (8) diallyl or triallylamine.

♦ · ·· . · · • · · · · • · · · • · · ·

Crosslinkers having at least one polymerizable double bond and at least one functional group reactive with an acidic monomer material include N-methylolacrylamide, glycidyl acrylate and the like. Suitable crosslinking agents having at least two functional groups reactive with the acidic monomer material include glyoxal; polyols such as ethylene glycol and glycerol; polyamines such as alkylenediamines (e.g. ethylenediamine), polyalkylene polyamines, polyepoxides, or polyglycidyl ethers and the like. Suitable polyvalent metal crosslinkers that may form ionic crosslinks include oxides, hydroxides, and weak acid salts (e.g., carbonate, acetate, and the like) of alkaline earth metals (e.g., calcium, magnesium) and zinc, including, for example, calcium oxide and zinc diacetate.

Crosslinkers of many of the foregoing types are described in more detail in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,076,663 and 4,861,539. Preferred crosslinkers include diesters or polyesters of unsaturated monocarboxylic or polycarboxylic acids monoallyl esters of polyols, bisacrylamides and diallyl- or triallylamines. Specific examples of particularly preferred crosslinking agents include N, N'-methylenebisacrylamide and trimethylolpropane triacrylate.

Crosslinking agents will generally comprise from 0.001 mole% to 5 mole% of the resulting hydrogel-forming polymeric material. More generally, the crosslinking agent will comprise from 0.01 mol% to 3 mol% of the hydrogel forming the polymeric gelling agent used herein. The hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agents can be utilized in their partially neutralized form. For the purposes of this invention, such materials are considered to be partially neutralized when at least 25 mole% and preferably at least 50 mole% of the monomers used to form the polymer are

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0010.tif" />

acid group-containing monomers which have been neutralized with a base. Suitable neutralizing basic cations include alkali metal and alkaline earth metal hydroxides (e.g. KOH, NaOH), ammonium, substituted ammonium, and amines such as aminoalcohols (e.g. 2-amino-2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, diethanolamine and 2-amino) This percentage of total monomers used that are neutralized by the acid group containing monomers is referred to herein as the degree of neutralization. The degree of neutralization preferably does not exceed 98%.

Hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agents suitable for use herein are well known in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,076,663, 4,062,817, 4,286,082, 5,061,259 and 4,654,039.

Hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agents used herein are also described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,731,067, 4,743,244, 4,813,945, 4,880,868, 4,892,533, 5,026,784, 5,079,306, U.S. Pat. 151,465, 4,861,539 and 4,962,172.

Suitable hydrogel-forming particulate polymeric gelling agents are commercially available from Hoechst Celanese Corporation, Portsmouth, VA, USA (Sanwet ™ Superabsorbent Polymers), Nippon Shokubai, Japan (Aqualic ™, e.g., L-75, L76) and Dow Chemical Company. , Midland, MI, USA (Dry Tech ™).

Hydrogel-forming polymeric gelling agents in the form of fibers are commercially available from Camelot Technologies Inc., Leominster, MA, USA (Fibersorb ™, e.g. SA 7200H, SA 7200M, SA 7000L, SA 7000 and SA 7300).

The articles of the present invention may also contain other hydrophilic gelling agents. These include polymers containing carboxylic acid as otherwise described above, except those having relatively low levels of crosslinking, so that they exhibit T_G below 140 ° C, as well as a variety of other water-soluble or colloidal water-soluble polymers such as cellulose ethers (e.g., hydroxyethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose), polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol, guar gum, hydroxypropyl guar gum, and xanthan gum. Among these other hydrophilic gelling agents, acid-forming polymers, especially carboxylic acid-containing polymers, are preferred. Particularly preferred are those comprising a water-soluble polymer of acrylic acid crosslinked with a polyalkenyl polyether of a polyhydric alcohol and optionally an acrylate ester or polyfunctional vinylidene monomer.

Preferred copolymers useful in the present invention are monomer blend polymers containing 95 to 99 wt. an olefinically unsaturated carboxylic monomer selected from the group consisting of acrylic, methacrylic and ethacrylic acids; 1 to 3.5 wt. % acrylate ester of formula:

R, O

CH₂= C — C — O — R wherein R is an alkyl radical of 10 to 30 carbon atoms and R 1 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl; and 0.1 to 0.6 wt. % of the polymerizable cross-linking polyalkenyl polyether of a polyhydric alcohol containing more than one alkenyl ether group per molecule, wherein the starting polyhydric alcohol contains at least 3 carbon atoms and at least 3 hydroxyl groups.

These polymers preferably contain from 96 to 97.9 wt. %

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0011.tif" />

100 ALIGN! % of acrylic acid and from 2.5 to 3.5 wt. % of the acrylate esters wherein the alkyl group contains 12 to 22 carbon atoms and R 1 is methyl, the acrylate ester is stearyl methacrylate. The amount of cross-linking polyalkenyl polyether monomer is preferably from 0.2 to 0.4 wt. %. Preferred cross-linking polyalkenyl polyether monomers are allylpentaerythritol, trimethylolpropanediallylether or allyl sucrose. These polymers are fully described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,509,949.

Other preferred copolymers useful in the present invention are polymers that contain at least two monomeric components, one is an olefinically unsaturated carboxylic acid monomer and the other is a polyalkenyl, polyhydric alcohol polyether. Other monomeric materials may also be present in the monomer mixture, if desired, even to a large extent.

The first monomer component useful in the production of these carboxylic polymers are olefinically unsaturated carboxylic acids containing at least one activated olefinic carbon-carbon double bond and at least one carboxyl group. Preferred carboxylic monomers are acrylic acids having the general structure:

R2

AND

CH₂= C — COOH where R² is a substituent selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen and cyanogen groups (-C = N), monovalent alkyl radicals, monovalent alkaryl radicals and monovalent cycloaliphatic radicals. Of this class, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid and ethacrylic acid are most preferred. Another useful carboxylic monomer is maleic anhydride or acid. The amount of acid used will be from 95.5 to 98.9 wt. %.

» ·· • · • · ··

101

The second monomer component useful in the production of these carboxyl polymers are polyalkenyl polyethers having more than one alkenyl ether moiety per molecule, such as alkenyl groups in which an olefinic double bond is present attached to the terminal methylene group CH2 = C &lt;.

Other monomeric materials that may be present in the polymers include polyfunctional vinylidene monomers containing at least two terminal CH₂groups including, but not limited to, butadiene, isoprene, divinylbenzene, divinylnaphthalene, allylacrylates and the like. These polymers are fully described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,798,053.

Examples of carboxylic acid copolymers useful in the present invention include Carbomer 934, Carbomer 941, Carbomer 950, Carbomer 951, Carbomer 954, Carbomer 980, Carbomer 981, Carbomer 1342, a crosslinked polymer of acrylates / Ci₀ to C₃₀alkyl acrylates (available as Carbopol 934, Carbopol 941, Carbopol 950, Carbopol 951, Carbopol 954, Carbopol 980, Carbopol 981, Carbopol 1342 and the Pemulen series from BFGoodrich).

Other carboxylic acid copolymers useful in the present invention include the sodium salts of copolymers of acrylic acid and acrylamide sold by Hoechst Celanese Corporation under the trademark Hostaceren PN73. Also included are hydrogel polymers sold by Lipo Chemicals Inc. As hydrogels under the trademark HYPAN. These hydrogels consist of crystalline portions of the nitrates on the backbone of the CC with various other dependent groups such as carboxyls, amides, and amidines. An example would include HYPAN SA 100 H, a polymer powder available from Lipo Chemical. Neutralizing agents for use in neutralizing the acid groups of these polymers include those described above.

102

Highly spreading oil:

Another optional ingredient in the preferred product component of the present invention is a high spread oil. It is particularly preferred that the high spread oil is contained when a vitamin B compound is used in the preferred component₃. Highly preferred conditioning ingredients further comprise from 3% to 10%, preferably from 3% to 8%, even more preferably from 4% to 6% of a high spread oil selected from

(1) branched chain hydrocarbons having a weight average molecular weight of 100 to 1000; and

2) liquid ester plasticizers of formula I:

R ^

R¹- C- (CH₂)_x - C

R3 //, OR⁴

Wherein R¹ is selected from hydrogen or CH 3, R 3², R³ and R⁴ are independently selected from straight chain Οχ to C 20 or branched alkyl chain and x is an integer from 1 to 20. These high spread oils can be used to carry a vitamin B compound₃ on the skin.

Suitable examples of branched chain hydrocarbons include isododecane, isohexadecane and isoeicosan. Isohexadecane is preferred. The polyolefins (alpha-olefin) anti-tacking agents described in more detail hereinbelow are also generally branched chain hydrocarbons. When using these anti-sticking agents, their amount must be considered as part of the amount of the high spread oils mentioned above.

44

4· 4444

103

Suitable ester softening materials of formula (I) above include methyl isostearate, isopropyl isostearate, isostearylneopentanoate, isononylisononanoate, isodecyloctanoate, isodecylisononanoate, tridecylisononanoate, myristyloctanoate, octylpelargonate, myristyl myristyl, myristyl myristyl, myristyl myristyl, myristyl myristyl, myristyl myristyl, myristyl myristyl. Preferred ester plasticizers for use in the present invention are isononylisononanoate, isostearylneopentanoate, methyl isostearate, isopropyl isostearate, isopropyl stearate, isopropyl myristate and mixtures thereof.

Particularly preferred high spread oils for use in the present invention are isohexadecane, isononyl isononanoate, methyl isostearate, isporopropyl isostearate or mixtures thereof. Even more preferred for use in the present invention is a high spread oil mixture comprising isohexadecane and isopropyl isostearate. Such a composition is particularly suitable when the compositions of the invention include high levels of glycerin. The ester softening material is preferably present in the compositions in a concentration of from 0.1% to 10%, preferably from 0.1% to 8%, in particular from 0.5% to 5% by weight. mixtures.

Anti-tacking agent:

It is preferred that the preferred ingredient of the present invention include one or more tackifiers when a vitamin B compound is also present.₃. Such preferred components also preferably comprise from 0.3% to 4%, preferably from 0.5% to 2.5%, even more preferably from 1% to 2% of an anti-tack agent selected from a polyalphaolefin having a molecular weight of from 260 to 1000 and an occlusive agent selected from petrolatum, cetylricinoleate, and lanolin. Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that polyalphaolefin tackifiers and occlusive tackifiers act by various types. of ·_β

·..··..· ·..··..·

104 mechanisms. However, both are effective in reducing the sticky feeling of the skin associated with elevated levels of vitamin B compounds₃. Although mixtures of tackifiers are not excluded, the best advantages are obtained when the tackifier is selected from only one of two classes.

Suitable polyalphaolefins described above may be derived from

1-alkene monomers having from 6 to 14 carbon atoms, preferably from 6 to 12 carbon atoms, especially from 8 to 12 carbon atoms. The polyalphaolefins useful herein are preferably hydrogenated polyalphaolefin oligomers. Examples of 1-alkene monomers for use in the preparation of polyalphaolefin oligomers of the present invention include 1-hexene, 1-octene, 1-decene, 1-dodecane, 1-tetradecene, branched chain isomers such as 4-methyl-1-pentene and combinations thereof. Most preferred are oligomers of 1-octene to 1-dodecene or combinations thereof. Polydecene is particularly preferred. Suitable polydecene oils are commercially available from Mobil Chemical Company, PO Box 3140, Edison, New Jersey 08818, USA under the trademark Puresyn ® 4 and from BP Amoco of 200 E. Randolph Drive, Chicago, II 606017125 under the trademark Silkflo® 364 NF. The most preferred anti-sticking agent is petrolatum.

Inorganic matting agent:

Inorganic matting agents, such as titanium or zinc oxide, can also be used as a preferred component of the subject articles. If present, the matting agent is used at a concentration of not more than 3% to prevent unwanted whitening of the skin or unnatural matt appearance. Titanium dioxide and in particular anatase titanium dioxide are preferably used.

Anatase titanium dioxide has a density of about 3.90 g / cm₃ and

9

9

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0012.tif" />

105 tetragonal cubic closed dense structure. The refractive index of anatase titanium dioxide is 2.55. Anatase titanium dioxide is available from Kobo Products Inc. under the trademark Kobo BTD 11S2, then by Whittaker, Clark, Daniels, South Plainfield, New Jersey, USA, under the trademark TiO₂9729 from Cardre Inc, South Plainfield, New Jersey, USA under the trademark Carde 70429.

Preferred matting agents for use in the present invention in terms of skin peeling, skin appearance and emulsion compatibility are pigmented coatings. The pigments may be treated with compounds such as amino acids such as lysine, silicones, lauroyl, collagen, polyethylene, lecithin, and ester oils. Most preferred matting agents are organosilicon (polysiloxane) treated pigments, for example polysiloxane treated titanium dioxide. Most preferred is polysiloxane-treated anastasis titanium dioxide. The function of the surface treatment is to hydrophobically modify the pigments so that they are wetted in the oil phase by the oil-in-water emulsions.

The total concentration of the inorganic matting agent may be from 0% to 3% and preferably from 0.1% to 2.5%, preferably from 0.25 to 2% by weight.

Cationic surfactants:

Cationic surfactants generally fall into the category of non-foaming surfactants, but can be used in the articles of the present invention provided they do not adversely affect the desired benefits of the articles.

Non-limiting examples of cationic surfactants useful in the present invention are described in the publications.

106

McCutcheon: Detergents and Emulsifiers, North American Edition (1986), published by Allured Publishing Corporation and McCutcheon: Functional Materials, North American Edition (1992).

Non-limiting examples of cationic surfactants which can be used in the present invention include cationic alkylammonium salts such as those of the formula:

RiR₂R₃R₄N⁺X

Where R_x is selected from an alkyl group having from 12 to 18 carbon atoms or aromatic, aryl or alkaryl groups having from 12 to 18 carbon atoms; R₂, R₃ and R₄ are independently selected from hydrogen, an alkyl group having from 1 to 18 carbon atoms or aromatic, aryl or alkaryl groups having from 12 to 18 carbon atoms and X is an anion selected from chloride, bromide, iodide, acetate, phosphate, nitrate, sulfate , methylsulfate, ethylsulfate, tosylate, lactate, citrate, glycolate and mixtures thereof. The alkyl groups may additionally contain ether bonds or substituents from a hydroxy or amino group (e.g. alkyl groups may contain polyethylene glycol and polypropylene glycol moieties).

More preferably, R 1 is an alkyl group having from 12 to 18 carbon atoms; R₂ is selected from hydrogen or an alkyl group having from 1 to 18 carbon atoms; R₃ and R₄ are independently selected from hydrogen or an alkyl group having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms and X is as described in the preceding paragraph.

Most preferably, R 1 is an alkyl group having from 12 to 18 carbon atoms; R₂, R₃ and R₄ are selected from hydrogen or an alkyl group having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms and X is as described

107 • · · • «9 • · • ···

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0013.tif" />

above

Other, alternatively useful cationic surfactants include amino amides, wherein in the above structure R 1 is alternatively R₅CO- (CH₂) _andwherein R₅ is an alkyl group having from 12 to 22 carbon atoms and n is an integer from 2 to 6, more preferably from 2 to 4, and most preferably from 2 to 3. non-limiting examples of such cationic emulsifiers include stearamidopropyl PG-dimmonium chloride phosphate, stearamidopropylethyldimonium ethosulfate, stearamidopropyldimethyl ammonium chloride, stearamidopropyldimethylcetearylammonium tosylate, stearamidopropyldimethylammonium chloride, stearamidopropyldimethylammonium lactate and mixtures thereof.

Nonlimiting examples of quaternary ammonium salt cationic surfactants include those selected from the group consisting of cetylamoniumchloridu, cetylamoniumbromidu, laurylamoniumchloridu, laurylamoniumbromidu, stearyl, stearylamoniumbromidu, cetyldimethylamoniumchloridu, cetyl dimethyl ammonium, dicetyl lauryldimetylamoniumbromidu, stearyldimethylamoniumchloridu, stearyldimethylamoniumbromidu, cetyltrimethylammonium chloride, cetyl trimethyl ammonium bromide, lauryl, lauryltrimethylamoniumbromidu, stearyltrimethylammonium chloride, stearyl, dicetyl dimethylammonium stearyldimethylcetyldilojového, dicetylamoniumchloridu, dicetylamoniumbromidu, dilauryl, dilauryl, distearylamoniumchloridu, distearylamoniumbromidu, dicetylmethylamoniumchloridu, dicetylmethylamoniumbromidu, dilaurylmethylamoniumchloridu, dilaurylmethylammonium bromide, distearylmethylammonium chloride, distearyldimethylammonium chloride, distearylmethylammonium bromide

44 • 4 · • 4 4 44 • 4 4 · ·

4 4 · ·4

44 • 4 4 ·

4 ··

4 4 4

4 4 4

44 • 4 «4

4 4 4

4 ·

4 4

4 4

4444

108 and mixtures thereof. Other quaternary ammonium salts include those wherein the alkyl hydrocarbon chain is C_i2 to C₂₂ derived from a tallow fatty acid or a coconut fatty acid. The term tallow refers to an alkyl group derived from tallow fatty acids (usually hydrogenated tallow fatty acids), which generally have mixtures of alkyl chains in the C range_i6 · Coconut refers to an alkyl group derived from a coconut fatty acid that generally has mixtures of alkyl chains in the C range_i2 to Ci₄. Examples of quaternary ammonium salts derived from these tallow and coconut sources include dilute dimethylammonium chloride, dilute dimethylammonium methylsulfate, di (hydrogenated tallow) dimethylammonium chloride, di (hydrogenated tallow) dimethylammonium acetate, dilute dipropylammonium dihydrochloride, coconut dimethylamide) dimethylammonium bromide, tallow ammonium chloride, coconut ammonium chloride, stearamidopropyl-PGdimonium chloride phosphate, stearamidopropylethyldimoniumethosulfate, stearamidopropyldimethyl (myristyl acetate) ammonium chloride, stearamidopropyldimethylcetearylammonium tosylate, stearamidopropyldimethylammonium chloride, stearamidopropyldimethylammonium lactate and mixtures thereof.

Preferred cationic surfactants useful in the present invention include those selected from the group consisting of dilauryldimethylammonium chloride, distearyldimethylammonium chloride, dimyristyldimethylammonium chloride, dipalmityldimethylammonium chloride, distearyldimethylammonium chloride, and mixtures thereof.

Chelators:

The articles of the present invention may also include a safe and effective amount of a chelating or chelating agent.

44

4 4 • 4 4 44

4 4 4 4

4 4 4

44

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0014.tif" />

• 4 44

4 4 »

4 »

4 4 4

4·4 »4 4444

109

As used herein, the term chelator or chelating agent means an active agent capable of removing a metal ion from the system by complexing such that the metal ion cannot readily participate in or catalyze chemical reactions. The inclusion of a chelating agent is particularly useful to provide protection against ultraviolet radiation, which may contribute to excessive peeling or skin texture changes, and against other environmental agents that may cause skin damage.

A safe and effective amount of a chelating agent may be added to the composition of the invention preferably from 0.1% to 10%, more preferably from 1% to 5% by weight. mixtures. Exemplary chelators that can be used herein are described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,487,884, International Application 91/16035 and International Application 91/16034. Preferred chelators useful in the compositions of the present invention are furildioxime, furildioxime derivatives, furilmonoxime derivatives, and combinations thereof.

Flavonoids:

The products of the present invention may optionally contain a flavonoid compound. Flavonoids are widely described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,686,082 and 5,686,367. Flavonoids suitable for use in the present invention are flavonones selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted flavonones, monosubstituted flavonones and mixtures thereof, chalcones selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted chalcones, monosubstituted chalcones, disubstituted chalcones, trisubstituted chalcones, and a mixture thereof, flavones consisting of unsubstituted flavones, monosubstituted flavones, disubstituted flavones and mixtures thereof, one or more isoflavones, coumarins selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted coumarins, «9

9 »9 • 9

9 9

99

9 · · « 9 99 • 9 9 9 « · » · »9 »9 »· • 9 9

9

9 *

»9 9999

110 monosubstituted coumarins, disubstituted coumarins and mixtures thereof, chromones selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted chromones, monosubstituted chromones, disubstituted chromones and mixtures thereof, one or more dicoumarols, one or more chromanones, one or more chromanols, their isomers (eg cis / trans isomers) and mixtures thereof. By term substituted as used herein is meant flavonoids wherein one or more of the flavonoid hydrogen atoms have been independently replaced by hydroxyl, alkyl C_x to C₈, alkoxy C_xto C₄, An O-glycoside and the like or mixtures of these substituents.

Examples of suitable flavonoids include, but are not limited to unsubstituted flavanones, mono-hydroxyflavanones (eg, 2'-hydroxyflavanone, β-hydroxyflavanone, 7-hydroxyflavanone, etc.), monoalkoxyflavanones (eg, 5-methoxyflavanone, 6-methoxyflavanone, 7-methoxyflavanone, 4-hydroxyflavanone). 1-methoxyflavanone, etc.), unsubstituted chalcone (especially unsubstituted trans-chalcone), monohydroxychalcones (eg 2'-hydroxychalcone, 4'-hydroxychalcone, etc.), di-hydroxychalcones (e.g. 2 ', 4-dihydroxychalcone, 2', 4'dihydroxychalcone, 2,2'-dihydroxychalcone, 2 ', 3-dihydroxychalcone, 2', 3'-dihydroxychalcone, 2 ', 5'-dihydroxychalcone, etc.) and trihydroxychalcones (e.g. . 2 ', 3', 4'-trihydroxychalcone, 4,2 ', 4'-trihydroxychalcone, 2,2', 4'-trihydroxychalcone, etc.), unsubstituted flavone, 7,2'-dihydroxyflavone, 3 ', 4'-dihydroxynaftoflavone , 4'-hydroxyflavone, 5,6-benzoflavone and 7,8-benzoflavone, unsubstituted isoflavone, daidzein (7,4'-dihydroxyisoflavone), 5,7-dihydroxy-4'-methoxyisoflavone, soy isoflavones (mixture extracted from soybean) , unsubstituted coumarin, 4-hydroxycoumarin, 7-hydroxycoumarin, 6-hydroxy-4-methylcoumarin, unsubstituted chromone, 3-formylchromone, 3-formyl-6-isopropylchromone, unsubstituted dicoumarol, unsubstituted chromanone, unsubstituted chromanol, and mixtures thereof.

* · ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **

Φ

Φ φ φ «

Φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ

Φ

Φ φ

φ

Φ «

ΦΦ «Φ φ

Φ

Φ φ φφφφ

111

Particularly preferred for use in the present invention are unsubstituted flavanone, methoxyflavanones, unsubstituted chalcone, 2 ', 4-dihydroxychalcone, and mixtures thereof. Most preferred are unsubstituted flavanone, unsubstituted chalcone (especially a transisomer), and mixtures thereof.

They may be synthetic materials or obtained as extracts from natural sources (eg plants). A derivative thereof can be prepared from a natural source material (e.g., glycoside, ester or ether can be prepared after extraction from a natural source). The flavonoid compounds which can be used in the present invention are commercially available from a number of sources, for example from Indofine Chemical Company, Inc. (Somerville, New Jersey), Steraloids, Inc. (Wilton, New Hampshire), and Aldrich Chemical Company, Inc. (Milwaukee, Wisconsin).

Mixtures of the above flavonoid compounds may also be used. The flavonoid compounds described herein are preferably present in the present invention at concentrations of from 0.01% to 20%, more preferably from 0.1% to 10%, and most preferably from 0.5% to 5%.

Sterols:

The articles of the present invention may comprise a safe and effective amount of one or more sterol compounds. Examples of useful sterol compounds include sitosterol, stigmasterol, campesterol, brassicasterol, lanosterol, 7-dehydrocholesterol, and mixtures thereof. They may be synthetic or from natural sources, eg mixtures extracted from plant sources (eg phytosterols).

Anti-cellulite agents:

The articles of the present invention may also include

99 • · * * • · *· • · · 9 · · ·· *· ···*

112 ·** • » · « · »♦· • · · · · • · · ·

A safe and effective amount of an anti-cellulite preferred component. Suitable agents may include, but are not limited to, xanthine compounds (eg, caffeine, theophylline, theobromine, and aminophylline).

Skin lightening agents:

The articles of the present invention may include a skin-explaining agent. When used, the compositions preferably comprise from 0.1% to 10%, more preferably from 0.2% to 5%, more preferably from 0.5% to 2% by weight. skin lightening agent based on the weight of the composition. Suitable skin lightening agents include those known in the art, including koji-acid, arbutin, ascorbic acid and derivatives thereof, e.g. magnesium ascorbyl phosphate or sodium ascorbyl phosphate or other salts of ascorbyl phosphate. Skin lightening agents suitable for use in the present invention also include those described in US patent application 08 / 479,935 corresponding to PCT application US 95/07432 and US patent application 08 / 390,152 corresponding to PCT application US 95/02809.

Binders:

The articles of the present invention may optionally contain binders. The binder or binder materials can be used to bond the various layers of the article to each other, thereby preserving the integrity of the article. The binders may be in a variety of forms, particularly sprayed binders, strips, discrete layers, bonding fibers, etc. Suitable binders may include latexes, polyamides, polyesters, polyolefins, and combinations thereof.

Optional ingredients suitable for incorporation into household care products (eg hard surface cleaning) according to the subject agent

113 invention:

Organic cleaning solvent:

The cleaning component of the disclosed disposable articles may comprise an effective amount of one or more organic cleaning solvents, generally not less than 0.25%, more preferably at least 0.5%, even more preferably 3.0% and not more than 7%, more preferably 5%. % cleaning component.

The surfactant provides cleaning or wetting even in the absence of a hydrophobic cleaning solvent, but cleaning can normally be further improved by using a genuine organic cleaning solvent. By organic cleaning solvent is meant an agent that aids the surfactant to remove impurities such as those normally found in a bathroom. The organic cleaning solvent may also be involved in forming the viscosity, if desired, and in increasing the stability of the composition. Mixtures containing₈ to Ci₆alkylpolyglucosides and C₈ to C 11 alkyl ethoxylates also have less soap bubble formation when a solvent is present. Thus, by simply controlling the amount of hydrophobic solvent in the formulation, the soap profile can be largely controlled.

Such solvents typically have a terminal hydrocarbon chain C₃ to C₆ attached to one to three moieties of ethylene glycol or propylene glycol to ensure an appropriate degree of hydrophobicity and preferably surface activity. Examples of commercially available hydrophobic cleaning solvents based on ethyl glycol chemistry include monoethylene glycol hexyl ether (Hexyl Cellosolve®, available from Union Carbide). Examples of commercially available hydrophobic cleaning solvents based on propylene glycol chemistry include

114 dipropylene glycol and tripropylene glycol derivatives of propyl alcohol and butyl alcohol, available from Areo Chemical, 3801 West Chester Pike, Newtown Square, PA 19073, USA, and Dow Chemical (1691 N. Swede Road, Midland, Michigan, USA) under the trade names Arcosolv ® and Dowanol®.

In the context of the present invention, preferred solvents are selected from the group consisting of monopropylene glycol mono propyl ether, dipropylene glycol monopropyl ether, monopropylene glycol monobutyl ether, dipropylene glycol monobutyl ether, dipropylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether. Butyl includes both normal butyl, isobutyl and tertiary butyl groups. Monopropylene glycol and monopropylene glycol monobutyl ether are the most preferred cleaning solvents and are available under the trade names Dowanol DPnP® and Dowanol DPnB®. Dipropylene glycol mono-t-butyl ether is commercially available from Areo Chemical under the trade name Arcosolv PTB®.

The amount of organic cleaning solvent may vary depending on the amount of other components present in the composition. Hydrophobic cleaning solvent normally helps ensure good cleaning, as is the case with floor cleaner applications.

When cleaning indoors, the solvent may cause undesirable small droplets to be inhaled. Therefore, it is desirable that the mixtures or solutions to be used in such spaces be substantially, more preferably completely free of such solvents.

Surfactants:

4 4 4 4

4444 444· ·· ·

4· 44 ·· 4444

115

The cleaning component of the present articles may comprise a small amount of anionic or nonionic detergent surfactants. Such anionic surfactants typically include a hydrophobic chain having from 8 carbon atoms to 18 carbon atoms, preferably from 8 carbon atoms to 16 carbon atoms, and typically include a sulfonate or carboxylate hydrophilic group. Generally, the level is optional, e.g.

% of anionic surfactants in the compositions of the present invention from 0.01% to 0.25%, more preferably from 0.01% to 0.2%, most preferably from 0.01% to 0.1% by weight. cleaning ingredients. In the context of flooring products, kitchen countertops and other surface applications, the choice of surfactant adjuvant can be critical both in choice of type and level. It has been found that cleaning components comprising C₈ to Ci₄ alkyl ethoxylates may have low C levels₈ sulfonate to improve the end result by producing a tinting effect. Tinting means improving the appearance of the final product by having less turbidity. If C₈sulfonate present, preferably in an amount of 1:10 to 1: 1 by weight based on the primary surfactant (s). C₈ the sulfonate is commercially available from Stepan under the trade name Bio-Terge PAS-8® as well as from Witco Corporation under the trade name Witconate NAS-8®. Another excellent tinting surfactant which is preferred in the present invention is Poly-Tergent CS-1, which is available from BASF. If present, Poly-Tergent CS-1 is preferably used in a weight ratio of 1:20 to 1: 1 to the primary surfactant (s). Other surfactants that can be used, although less preferably, and generally at very low levels, include C₈ to Ci₈alkyl sulfonates (Hostapur SAS® from Hoechst,

Aktiengesellschaft, D-6230 Frankfurt, Germany), Cio to C₁₄

116 linear or branched alkylbenzene sulfonates, C8 to C8₁₅alkylethoxycarboxylate detergent surfactants (Neodox® surfactants available from Shell Chemical Corporation), C₁₀ to C_X4 alkyl sulfates and ethoxy sulfates (e.g., Stepanol AM® from Stepan). The alkyl ethoxycarboxylates may advantageously be used at very low levels (0.01% or less) to dissolve the perfume. This may be an important advantage if low levels of active ingredient are needed for the present invention to be most effective as a household cleaning product.

Alternative nonionic detergent surfactants for use in the present invention are alkoxylated alcohols, generally comprising from 6 to 16 carbon atoms in the hydrophobic alkyl chain of the alcohol. Typical alkoxylation groups are a combination of propoxy or propoxy ethoxy. Such compounds are commercially available under the tradename Antarox® from Rhodia (POBox 425 Cranberry, New Jersey 08512) with a wide range of chain lengths and alkoxylation steps. Block copolymers of ethylene oxide and propylene oxide can also be used and are available from BASF under the trade name Pluronic®. Preferred nonionic detergent surfactants for use in the present invention are of the formula R (X)_nH, wherein R is an alkyl chain having from 6 to 16 carbon atoms, preferably from 8 to 12, X is propoxy or a mixture of ethoxy propoxy groups, n is an integer from 4 to 30, preferably from 5 to 8. Other nonionic surfactants active agents that can be used include those derived from natural sources such as sugars and include C 8 to C 16 N alkyl glucosoamide surfactants. If present, the concentration of alternative nonionic surfactants is from 0.01% to 0.2%, more preferably from 0.01% to 0.1% by weight.

• ·

117 cleaning ingredients.

Monocarboxylic or polycarboxylic acids:

For the purpose of removing the soap and hard water stains, the cleaning component of the article may be acidified to a pH of from 2 to 5, more preferably around 3. The acidity is at least partially achieved by using one or more organic acids which then have less than 5, preferably less. Such organic acids may aid in the formation of phases for thickening, if necessary, as well as providing for the removal of hard water stains. Organic acids have been found to be very effective in removing hard water stains within the compositions of the present invention. Lower pH and the use of one or more suitable acids has also proven advantageous for disinfection purposes.

Examples of suitable monocarboxylic acids include acetic acid, glycolic acid or β-hydroxypropionic acid and the like. Examples of suitable polycarboxylic acids include citric acid, tartaric acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, and mixtures thereof. Such acids are readily available commercially. Examples of more preferred polycarboxylic acids, especially non-polymeric polycarboxylic acids include citric acid (available from Aldrich Corporation, 1001 West Saint Paul Avenue, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, USA), a mixture of succinic, glutaric and adipic acid available from DuPont (Wilmington, Delaware, USA). ) sold as refined AGS di-basic acid, maleic acid (also available from Aldrich) and mixtures thereof. Citric acid is most preferred, particularly for applications requiring soap cleaning. Glycolic acid and a mixture of adipic, glutaric and succinic acids give greater benefits in removing stains from: • 0 4 0 40 0 ​​0 · 00 0 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 04 44 ·· ·· 4404

118 hard water. The amount of organic acid in the compositions of the present invention may be from 0.01% to 1%, more preferably from 0.01% to 0.5%, most preferably from 0.025% to 0.25% by weight.

cleaning ingredients.

Aroma agents:

The cyclodextrins can be used in the cleaning component of the present invention. As used herein, the term cyclodextrin includes all known cyclodextrins, such as unsubstituted cyclodextrins containing from 6 to 12 glucose units, especially alpha-cyclodextrin, beta-cyclodextrin, gamma-cyclodextrin, or derivatives or mixtures thereof. Alpha-cyclodextrin consists of 6 glucose units, beta-cyclodextrin consists of 7 glucose units, and gamma-cyclodextrin consists of 8 glucose units arranged in donut-shaped circles. The specific bonding and structure of the glucose units gives the cyclodextrins rigid, conical molecular structures with hollow interiors with specific volumes. The lining of each inner cavity is formed by hydrogen atoms and glycosidic bridging oxygen atoms. This surface is therefore relatively hydrophobic. The particular shape and physicochemical properties of the cavity allow the cyclodextrin molecules to be absorbed, ie, to form inclusion complexes with organic molecules or portions of organic molecules that may fit into the cavity. Many aroma-forming molecules can fit into the cavity, including many unpleasant smelling molecules and perfume molecules. Therefore, cyclodextrins, and in particular mixtures of cyclodextrins with cavities of different sizes, can be used to treat the aroma caused by a wide variety of organic aromatic materials, which may or may not contain reactive functional groups. Complexing between cyclodextrin and aromatic molecules takes place in the presence of water

119 it appears rapidly, but the extent of complex formation also depends on the polarity of the absorbed molecules. In aqueous solution, strongly hydrophilic molecules (those that are highly water soluble), if at all, only partially absorbed. Thus, cyclodextrin does not complex effectively with some very low molecular weight organic amines and acids when present to a small extent on a wet surface. However, when water is removed, for example, when a surface is dried, some low molecular weight organic amines and acids have greater affinity and more easily complex with cyclodextrins.

The cavities in the cyclodextrin in the solution of the present invention should remain substantially unfilled (cyclodextrin remains uncomplexed) when the cyclodextrin is in solution to allow the cyclodextrin to absorb various aromatic molecules when the solution is applied to the surface. The non-derivatized (normal) betacyclodextrin may be present in an amount up to its solubility limit of about 1.85% (about 1.85 g in 100 grams of water) at room temperature. Beta-cyclodextrin is not preferred for ingredients that call for a level of cyclodextrin higher than its water solubility limit. Non-derivatized beta-cyclodextrin is generally not preferred when the component contains a surfactant, as it affects the surface activity of most preferred surfactants that are compatible with the derivatized cyclodextrins.

The aqueous cleaning component of the present invention is preferably clear. The term clear as defined herein means transparent or translucent, preferably clear as water, i.e. transparent when viewed through a layer of less than 10 cm thickness.

The cyclodextrins used in the present invention are preferably highly water-soluble, such as alpha-cyclodextrin or its

120 derivatives, gamma-cyclodextrin or derivatives thereof, derivatized beta-cyclodextrins or mixtures thereof. Cyclodextrin derivatives consist mainly of molecules in which some OH groups are converted to OR groups. Cyclodextrin derivatives include, for example, those having short chain alkyl groups such as methylated cyclodextrins and ethylated cyclodextrins, wherein R is methyl or ethyl; those having hydroxyalkyl substituted groups such as hydroxypropylcyclodextrins or hydroxyethylcyclodextrins, wherein R is -CH₂-CH (OH) - CH₃ or -CH₂CH₂-OH; branched cyclodextrins such as maltose-linked cyclodextrins; cationic cyclodextrins such as those containing 2-hydroxy-3- (dimethylamino) propyl ether, wherein R is CH₂-CH (OH) - CH₂-NCH3) ₂which is cationic at low pH; quaternary ammonium, e.g. 2-hydroxy-3- (trimethylammonio) propyl ether chloride, wherein R is CH₂-CH (OH) —CH₂—N⁺ (CH3) ₃NO. 1^-; anionic cyclodextrins such as carboxymethylcyclodextrins, cyclodextrinsulfates and cyclodextrinsuccinylates; amphoteric cyclodextrins such as carboxymethyl / quaternary ammonium cyclodextrins; cyclodextrins in which at least one glucopyranose unit has a 3-6-anhydrocyclomalt structure, e.g., mono-3-6-anhydrocyclodextrins and mixtures thereof as described in F. DiedainiPilard and B. Pearls: Optimal Performance with Minimal Chemical Modification of Cyclodextrines, abstract from the 7th International Cyclodextrin Symposium, April 1994, p. 49. Other

<td colspan="3">derivatives</td><td colspan="2">cyclodextrin</td><td>j sou</td><td>described</td><td colspan="3">in patent</td><td>writings</td>

<td>US</td><td> 3</td><td> 426</td><td> 011,</td><td>US 3,453</td><td> 257,</td><td>US 3,453</td><td> 258,</td><td>US</td><td> 3 453</td><td>259 a</td>

<td>US</td><td> 3</td><td> 453</td><td> 260,</td><td>US 3,459</td><td>¹ 731,</td><td colspan="2">US 3,553,191,</td><td></td><td>US 3</td><td> 565 887,</td>

<td>US</td><td> 4</td><td> 535</td><td> 152,</td><td>US 4,616</td><td> 008,</td><td>US 4,678</td><td> 598,</td><td>US</td><td> 4 638</td><td>058 a</td>

US 4,746,734.

« * * *

121

Highly water soluble cyclodextrins are those having a water solubility of at least 10 g in 100 ml of water at room temperature, preferably at least 20 g in 100 ml of water, more preferably at least 25 g in 100 ml of water at room temperature. The availability of soluble, non-complex cyclodextrins is essential for effective control of aroma activity. Water-soluble cyclodextrins can exhibit more efficient aroma control than water-insoluble cyclodextrins when deposited on the surface.

Examples of preferred water-soluble cyclodextrin derivatives suitable for use in the present invention include hydroxypropyl-alpha-cyclodextrin, methylated alpha-cyclodextrin, methylated beta-cyclodextrin, hydroxyethyl-beta-cyclodextrin, and hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin. The hydroxyalkylcyclodextrin derivatives preferably have a degree of substitution of from 1 to 14, more preferably from 1.5 to 7, wherein the total number of OR groups per cyclodextrin is defined as the degree of substitution. The methylated cyclodextrin derivatives generally have a degree of substitution of from 1 to 18, preferably from 3 to 16. The known methylated beta-cyclodextrin is heptakis-2,6-di-O-methyl-D-cyclodextrin, commonly known as DIMEB, in which each glucose unit has about 2 methyl groups with a degree of substitution of about 14. A preferred, more commercially available, methylated beta-cyclodextrin is a randomly methylated beta-cyclodextrin, commonly known as RAMEB, having various degrees of substitution, normally about 12.6. RAMEB is more preferred than DIMEB because DIMEB affects the surface activity of preferred surfactants more than RAMEB. Preferred cyclodextrins are available, for example, from Cerestar USA Inc. and Wacker Chemicals (USA), Inc.

It may also be advantageous to use a mixture of cyclodextrins in the cleaning component. Such compositions absorb more aroma by complexing

122 a wide variety of aromatic molecules having a broader range of molecular sizes. Preferably at least a portion of the cyclodextrin is alpha-cyclodextrin or derivatives thereof, gamma-cyclodextrin or derivatives thereof, or derivatized beta-cyclodextrin, more preferably a mixture of alpha-cyclodextrin or alpha-cyclodextrin derivatives and derivatized beta-cyclodextrin, even more preferably a mixture of derivatized alpha-cyclodextrin and derivatized beta-cyclodextrin, most preferably a mixture of hydroxypropyl-alpha-cyclodextrin and hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin or a mixture of methylated alpha-cyclodextrin and methylated beta-cyclodextrin. In some embodiments, it is preferred that the cleaning component of the present invention contain low levels of cyclodextrin so that no visible residue appears at normal levels of use. Preferably, the cleaning component used to treat the surface under conditions of use is substantially dry. Typical cyclodextrin rates in the compositions used for the respective use are from 0.01% to 1%, preferably from 0.05% to 0.75%, more preferably from 0.1% to 0.5% by weight. cleaning ingredients. Components with higher concentrations may leave unacceptable visible residues.

Peroxide sources:

The cleaning component of the articles of manufacture may contain a peroxide such as hydrogen peroxide or a source of hydrogen peroxide for further benefits in terms of disinfecting and preventing mold growth. The components of the cleaning component are substantially compatible with the use of peroxides. Preferred peroxides include benzoyl peroxide and hydrogen peroxide. These may optionally be present in the compositions in an amount of from 0.05% to 5%, more preferably from 0.1% to 3%, and most preferably from 0.2% to 1.5%.

When peroxide is present, it is desirable to provide a stabilization system. Suitable stabilization systems are known. The preferred stabilization system consists of radical reactive substances and&gt; φ • ···

123 or metal chelants present at levels of from 0.01% to 10%

0.5%, more preferably from 0.01% to 0.25%, most preferably from 0.01% to 0.25%

0.1 wt. cleaning ingredients. Examples of radical reactants include antioxidants such as propyl gallate, butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), and the like. Examples of suitable metal chelants include diethylenetriaminepentaacetate, diethylenetriaminepentamethylene phosphonate, hydroxyethyldiphosphonate and the like.

Thickening polymer:

Low levels of polymer can also be used to thicken the cleaning component of the present invention. In general, the thickening polymer level is kept as low as possible so as not to damage the final properties of the article. A particularly preferred thickening agent is xanthan gum as it can also enhance the final properties, especially when used in low concentrations. The thickening polymeric agent is present in an amount of 0.001% to 0.1%, more preferably from 0.0025% to 0.05%, most preferably from 0.005% to 0.025% by weight. cleaning ingredients.

Aqueous solvent system:

The cleaning components, which are aqueous, comprise at least 80 wt. % of an aqueous solvent, based on the component, more preferably from 80% to more than 99% by weight, based on the component. The aqueous components are generally micellar in form and do not include substantial amounts of water-insoluble components that cause substantial micellar swelling.

The aqueous solvent system may also include low molecular weight, highly water soluble solvents, which are generally found in detergent compositions, e.g.

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0015.tif" />

124 isopropanol, etc. These solvents can be used to provide the disinfectant properties of low active ingredients. Furthermore, they may be particularly useful in the ingredients, where the overall perfume level is very low. As a result, highly volatile solvents can provide stroke and enhance perfume character. When very volatile solvents are present, they are generally present in an amount of from 0.25% to 5%, more preferably from 0.5% to 3%, most preferably from 0.5% to 2% by weight. folders. Examples of such solvents include methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, n-butnol, isobutanol, 2-butanol, pentanol, 2-methyl-1-butanol, methoxymethanol, methoxyethanol, methoxypropanol and mixtures thereof. The cleaning ingredients of the present invention may also include other solvents, and in particular paraffins and isoparaffins, which can substantially reduce the soap suds formed by the ingredient.

Foam suppressant:

Suitable silicone suds suppressors used herein include silicone and silica-silicone mixtures. Silicones can generally be represented by alkylated polysiloxane materials, while silica is normally used in fine forms, such as silica aerogels and xerogels and hydrophobic silicas of various types. In industrial practice, the term silicone has become a generic term that includes a number of relatively high molecular weight polymers containing siloxane units and hydrocarbon groups of various types. Silicone compounds have been widely described in the art, see, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,076,648, 4,021,365, 4,749,740, 4,983,316, and European Patents EP 150,872, EP 217,501 and EP 499,364. Preferred are polydiorganosiloxanes, such as polydimethylsiloxanes having trimethylsilyl terminal blocking agents.

125 units and having a viscosity at 25 ° C of 5 x 10⁵ m²/ s up to 0.1 m²These substances are advantageous because of their easy availability and relatively low cost.

A preferred type of silicone compounds useful in the cleaning component comprises a mixture of an alkylated siloxane of the type described above and solid silica. The solid silica may be smoky silica and precipitated silica or silica obtained by a gel formation technique. The silica particles can be rendered hydrophobic by treatment with dialkylsilyl groups or trialkylsilane groups which are either bonded directly to the silica or by means of a silicone resin. A preferred silicone compound comprises a hydrophobic silanated, most preferably trimethylsilane silica having a particle size in the range of 10 mm to 20 mm and a specific surface area above 50 m²/G. Suitably, the silicone compounds utilized in the compositions of the present invention have an amount of silica in the range of 1 to 30% (more preferably 2.0 to 15%) by weight based on the total weight of the silicone compounds to yield silicone compounds having an average viscosity in the range of 2 x 10⁴ m²/ md 1 m²/with. Preferred silicone compounds may have a viscosity in the range of 5 x 10 &amp; quot;³ m²/ s up to 0.1 m²/with. Silicone compounds with a viscosity of 2 x 10 are particularly suitable^-2 m²/ s or 4.5 x 10 ~² m²/with.

Suitable silicone compounds for use in the present invention are commercially available from a number of companies, including Rhone Pouleno, Fueller and Dow Corning. Examples of silicone compounds that can be used in the present invention are Silicone DB® 100 and Silicone Emulsion 2-3597®. Both fabrics are available from Dow Corning.

126

Perfume:

One or more perfumes may also be included in the cleaning component of the articles of the present invention. As used herein, perfume includes perfume ingredients that are added primarily because of their olfactory advantageous properties, often accompanied by the use of a volatile organic solvent such as ethanol.

Most hard surface cleaning products contain some perfume in order to achieve an olfactory aesthetic advantage and to conceal the chemical aroma that the product may have. The main function of the small fraction of highly volatile, low-boiling (low boiling) perfume ingredients in these perfumes is to improve the scent of the product itself rather than achieve the subsequent scent of the cleaned surface, but some less volatile, high-boiling perfume ingredients can provide a fresh and clean impression of surfaces it is desirable that these components be stored and present on a dry surface.

Perfumes are preferably those which are more water soluble or volatile to minimize staining and film formation. Perfumes that can be used in the present invention are described in more detail in U.S. Patent 5,108,660, col. 8, lines 48 to 68, col. 9, lines 1 to 68 and col. 10 rows 1 to 24.

The perfume ingredients may be natural products such as essential oils, absolute, resinoids, resins, concretes, etc., and abeno synthetic perfume ingredients such as hydrocarbons, alcohols, aldehydes, ketones, ethers, acids, acetals, ketals, nitriles, etc., including saturated and unsaturated compounds, aliphatic, carboxyl and heterocyclic compounds.

• »» · • • • • • • • • •

127

Examples of such perfume compounds are: geraniol, geranylacetate, linalool, linalylacetate, tetrahydrolinalool, citronellol, citronellyl acetate, dihydromyrcenol, dihydromyrcenylacetate, terpineol, terpinylacetate, acetate, 2-phenylethanol, 2-phenylethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl acetate, benzylsalicylate, benzyl benzylbenzylate, benzyl benzoate, cyclohexyl acetate, isononyl acetate, alpha-n-amyl cinnamic aldehyde, alpha-hexyl cinnamic aldehyde, 2-methyl-3- (p-tert-butylphenyl) propanal, 2-methyl-3- (p-isopropylphenyl) propanal, 3- (p-tert-butylphenyl) propanal, tricyclodecenyl acetate, tricyclodecenyl propionate, 4- (4-hydroxy-4-methylpentyl) 3- caclohexenecarbaldehyde, 4- (4-methyl-3-pentenyl) -3-cyclohexenecarbaldehyde, 4-acetoxy-3-pentyl tetrahydropyran, methyldihydrojasmonate, 2-n-heptyl-cyclopentanone, 3-methyl-2-pentyl-cyclopentanone, n- decanal, n-dodecanal, 9-decenol-1, phenoxyethylisobutyrate, phenylacetaldehyde diethyl acetal, phenylacetaldehyde diethyl acetal, geranonitrile, citronellonitrile, cedrylacetate, 3isocamphylcyclohexanol, cedrylether, isolongifolanone, aubepinenitrile, aubepine, heliotropin, coumarin, eugenol, vanillin, diphenyloxide, hydroxycitronellal, ionones, methylionones, hexyl, isomethylolizone, isomethylolizone, esomethylolone tetralin musk, isochroman musk, macrocyclic ketones, macrolactone musk, ethylenebrassylates, aromatic nitro musk. In this sense, the cleaning component typically comprises from 0.1% to 2% by weight of the composition. perfume ingredients, based on the cleaning component, or mixtures thereof, preferably from 0.1% to 1%. In a preferred peroxide-containing embodiment, the perfumes may be selected to be compatible with the oxidant.

In one embodiment, the perfume cleanser components are hydrophobic and highly volatile, eg, components having a boiling point of less than 260 ° C, preferably less than 250 ° C and a ClogP of at least 3, more preferably more than 3.2.

<td></td><td> *· »· ··</td><td> ····</td>

<td> 128</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>than 255</td><td>° C and more preferably</td><td>less than</td>

<td>advantage</td><td>more than 3.1</td><td>and even</td>

LogP values ​​have been published for many folders. For example, the Pomona92 database, available from Daylight Chemical Information Systems, Inc. (Daylight CIS), Irvine, California, USA, contains many values, along with citations to the original literature. However, logP values ​​are most easily calculated using CLOGP, which is also available from daylight CIS. This program also reports experimental LogP values ​​when available in the Pomona92 database. The calculated logP (ClogP) is determined by the fragment approach of Hansch and Leo (cf. A.Leo in Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry, Volume 4, C. Hansch, PGSammens, JB Taylor and CARamsden, Eds., P. 295, Pergamon Press, 1990). The fragment approach is based on the chemical structure of each component and takes into account the numbers and types of atoms, the conductivity of atoms and the chemical bonds. The ClogP values, which are the most reliable and widely used estimates for this physicochemical property, are preferably used in place of the experimental logP values ​​in the choice of the basic solvent ingredients used in the present invention. Other methods that can be used to calculate ClogP include, for example, the Crippen fragmentation method as described in J. Chem. Inf. Comput. Sci., 27, 21 (1987); The Viswnadham fragmentation method as described in J. Chem. Inf. Comput. Sci., 29,163 (1989); and the Brot method as described in Eur. J. Med. Chem.-Chim. Theor. 19, 71 (1984).

Substances with detergent effects:

Detergents that are effective for hard cleaning agents may also be included in the cleansing component. 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 * «··· ···· 9 9 9

99 99 99 99 9999

129 surfaces and have less film and smudge capability. Preferred detergent materials are the carboxylic acids described above in describing polycarboxylic acids. They include citric acid and tartaric acid. Tartaric acid improves cleaning and can minimize the problem of film formation or smudges that typically occur when detergents are added to hard surface cleaners.

The detergent agent is present in an amount that provides detergent effects and those detergent agents that are not part of the acidic pH adjustment described above are generally present in an amount of from 0.01% to 0.3%, more preferably from 0.005% % to 0.2%, and most preferably from 0.05% to 0.1%. cleaning agent.

Buffers:

The cleaning component of the article of manufacture may also contain other various additives known in the art about detergent compositions. Preferably, they are not used in an amount that causes unacceptable film and smear formation. Buffers are an important class of additions in this application. They appear mainly as a result of using a low amount of active ingredient. An ideal buffer system will maintain the pH within the desired narrow range without causing smears and film. Preferred buffers in the context of the invention are those that are highly volatile but can provide cleaning benefits in use. As such, they are advantageous in that they can be used in higher amounts than the corresponding buffers, which are less volatile. Such buffers tend to have a low molecular weight, i. less than 150 g / mol and generally contain no more than one hydroxy group. Examples of preferred buffers include ammonia, methanolamine, ethanolamine, 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol, 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol. ·· ··· ·

130 dimethylamino-2-methyl-1-propanol, acetic acid, glycolic acid and the like. Of these, ammonia, 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-1-propanol and acetic acid are most preferred. When used, these buffers are present in an amount of 0.005% to 0.5%, with higher amounts being more preferred for more volatile chemicals.

Non-volatile buffers can also be used in the present invention. Such buffers can generally be used in lower amounts than preferred amounts because they tend to form stripes and film. Examples of such buffers include, but are not limited to, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, and bicarbonate, 1,3bis (aminomethyl) cyclohexane, sodium citrate, citric acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, and the like. Particularly preferred is maleic acid as a buffer because of its tendency not to induce surface damage. Citric acid is also desirable because it provides antimicrobial benefits as a registered EPA active agent. In addition, detergents comprising polymers have been found to have an acidity to provide better wetting and provide a longer lasting coating, especially when the articles in question are used for daily shower cleaning. When used, the nonvolatile buffers are present in an amount of 0.001% to 0.05% by weight based on the weight of the composition.

Non-limiting examples of other ingredients are enzymes such as proteases, hydrotropes such as sodium toluene sulfonate, sodium cumene sulfonate and potassium xylene sulfonate; thickeners other than hydrophilic polymers in an amount of from 0.01% to 0.5%, preferably from 0.01% to 0.1%; appearance enhancing additives, such as colorants, provided that they do not adversely affect the formation of film or smudges.

Preservatives and antibactericidal agents:

131 «Ν * 4 4 *» 4 44 ♦ • 4 «4444 44» ·

4 444 4 4 44 4 4 4

44 «44 «4 444 4 4

4·4· 4444 444 «4 44 44 4· 44 4444

Protective agents may also be used and may be required in many of the preferred ingredients of household care products, especially those containing large amounts of water. Examples of preservatives include bronopol, hexitidine sold by Angus Chemical, 211 Sanders Road, Northbrook, Illinois, USA. Other preservatives include cathone, - 2- (hydroxymethyl) (amino) ethanol, propylene glycol, sodium hydroxymethylaminoacetate, formaldehyde and glutaraldehyde, dichloro-s-triazine trione, trichloro-s-triazine trione and quaternary ammonium salts including dioctyldimethylammonium chloride, didecyldimethylammonium ammonium₂-, C₁₄and Ci₆-dimethylbenzyl. Preferred preservatives include 1,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one and polyhexamethylenebiguanide, marketed by Avicia Chemicals, Wilmington, Delaware 19897, USA, and chlorhexide diacetate, marketed by Aldrich-Sigma, 1001 West Saint Paul Avenue, Milwaukee, WI 53233, USA , sodium pyrithione, sold by Arch Chemicals, 501 Merritt Seven, POBox 5204, Norwalk CT 06856,

USA. If protective agents are used, they are preferably present in concentrations of from 0.0001% to 0.001%. The same preservatives may act to provide antibacterial control on the surface, but will generally require higher concentrations of from 0.005 to 0.1%. Other antibacterial agents may be present, including quaternary ammonium salts, but are not preferred in the context of the present invention at high concentrations, i.e., concentrations greater than 0.05%. It has been found that such compounds often interfere with the advantages of preferred polymers. In particular, quaternary ammonium surfactants tend to hydrophobically modify hard surfaces. Thus, it has been found that preferred polymers are ineffective in compositions comprising significant concentrations of quaternary ammonium surfactants. Similar results were found when used

132 *· *9 ««4 *· *·

9 9 9 9 9 9

9 999 · 9 99 9 9 4 • 99 949 4 · · 4 · · 9 • · · · «4·· 999

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 99 99 9 * 44 amphoteric surfactants, including betaine and cocoamidobetaine. If cationic or amphoteric surfactants are present, their concentrations should be below 0.1%, preferably below 0.05%. However, more hydrophobic antibacterial and germicidal agents such as orthobenzylparachlorophenol are not used. If present, such substances should be present at concentrations below 0.05%.

Other ingredients suitable for inclusion in the articles of the present invention:

Next layers:

In some embodiments, the article of the present invention may comprise one or more additional layers which will be distinguished by one skilled in the art as being separate from the laminate web. Such additional layers may contribute to the efficiency of the product by providing it with weight. In the context of personal care, additional layers are suitable for enhancing the feeling of softness of the side of the article that comes into contact with the area being cleaned or treated. Suitable additional layers include the materials described above as suitable layers of the laminate strip.

Preferred other layers of the present invention are nonwoven materials. Suitable nonwoven materials made of synthetic materials useful in the present invention can be obtained from a variety of commercial sources. Non-limiting examples of suitable materials that can be used herein for laminate web layers include:

HEF 40-047, a slit-bonded hydroentangled material that contains 50% Rayon and 50% Polyester and has a basis weight of 61 g / m 2² and available from Veratec,

133 · Ne ne · ne ne l, Walpole, MA, USA;

HEF 140-102, which is a slit-bonded hydroentangled material containing 50% rayon and 50% polyester and having a basis weight of 67 g / m 2² and available from Veratec, Inc., Walpole, MA, USA;

Novonet® 149-616, a thermally bonded grid patterned material containing 100% polypropylene and having a basis weight of 60 g / m 2²available from Veratec, Inc., Walpole, MA, USA;

Novonet® 149-801, a thermally bonded grid patterned material containing 69% Rayon, about 25% Polypropylene and 6% Cotton and having a basis weight of 90 g / m 2²available from Veratec, Inc., Walpole, MA, USA;

Novonet® 149-191, a thermally bonded grid patterned material containing 69% rayon, about 25% polypropylene and 6% cotton and having a basis weight of 120 g / m 2²available from Veratec, Inc., Walpole, MA, USA;

HEF Nubtex® 149-801, slit-bonded hydro-knitted material containing 100% polyester and having a basis weight of 84 g / m²available from Veratec, Inc., Walpole, MA,

USA;

Keybak® 95IV, dry-formed, slit-shaped material, containing 75% rayon, 25% acrylic fibers and having a basis weight of 51 g / m 2²which is available from Chicopee,

New Brunswick, NJ, USA;

Keybak® 1368, slotted hole material, containing 75% Rayon, 25% Polyester and having a basis weight of 47 g / m²available from Chicopee, New Brunswick, NJ, USA;

·«· * · · · · • · · · · · · · · ·

134

Duralace® 1236, slit-bonded hydroentangled material containing 100% rayon and having a basis weight of 48 g / m 2² up to 138 g / m²available from Chicopee, New Brunswick, NJ, USA;

Duralace® 5904, slit-bonded hydroentangled material containing 100% polyester and having a basis weight of 48 to 138 g / m 2²available from Chicopee, New Brunswick, NJ, USA;

Chicopee® 5763, carded hydroentangled material (8 x 6 slotted holes per inch, 3x2 slotted holes per cm), containing 70% Rayon, 30% Polyester and optionally a latex binder (based on acrylate or ethyl vinyl acetate) up to 5% w / w wt. and having a basis weight of 60 g / m 2² up to 90 g / m²available from Chicopee, New Brunswick, NJ, USA;

Chicopee® 9900 Series, (ie Chicopee 9931, 62 g / m.)², 50/50 rayon / polyester and Chicopee 9950, 50 g / m², 50/50 rayon / polyester) carded hydroentangled material containing a blend of 50% Rayon / 50% Polyester to 0% Rayon / 100% Polyester or 100% Rayon / 0% Polyester and having a basis weight of from 36 g / m² up to 84 g / m²available from Chicopee, New Brunswick, NJ, USA;

Sontara 8868, hydroentangled material containing 50% cellulose and 50% polyester and having a basis weight of 72 g / m 2²available from Dupont Chemical Corp.

Preferred nonwoven substrate materials have a basis weight of 24 g / m 2² up to 96 g / m²more preferably 36 g / m 2² up to 84 g / m² and most preferably from 42 g / m 2² up to 78 g / m².

135

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0016.tif" />

The further layer may also include a polymer sponge sponge as described in European patent application EP 702550A1. Such polymeric web sponges include a plurality of extruded tubular mesh webs prepared from nylon or a rigid flexible polymer, such as olefin polymer polyamide and polycarboxylic acid polyamide addition polymers.

The additional layer may also include formed sheets and composite materials, i.e., multiple materials comprising formed sheets. The films thus formed preferably comprise plastics which tend to be soft to the skin. Suitable soft films made of plastic are polyolefins such as low density polyethylene (LDPE). In such cases, where the further layer comprises a sheet made of plastic, it is preferred that the layer is provided with slotted openings, for example, slotted macro openings or slotted micro openings such that the layer is liquid pervious. In one embodiment, the layer comprises a foil formed of a plastic having only slit micro-holes. In another embodiment, the additional layer comprises a plastic sheet having both slit micro-apertures and slit macro-apertures. In such embodiments, the layer is well suited to come into contact with the area to be cleaned or therapeutically treated, making it feel as if the slit-micro-film is β

136 was the substance. In such an embodiment, the surface protrusions of the slit micro-holes preferably face the opposite side to the surface protrusions of the slit macro-holes on the additional layer. In such a case, the macro-holes are believed to maximize the overall wetting and foaming of the article by the three-dimensional thickness formed from the surface protrusions that are under constant compression and release of compression during use of the article, thereby creating foam-forming bladder depressions.

In any case, the further layer comprising the formed film preferably has at least 100 slotted holes / cm²more preferably 500 holes / cm²even more preferably at least 1000 slotted holes / cm²on the substrate. More preferred embodiments of the present invention include a nonwoven layer having a water flow rate of from 5 cm³/ cm². s up to 70 cm³/ cm²more preferably from 10 cm³/ cm².s up to 50 cm³/ cm²most preferably from 15 cm³/ cm².s up to 40 cm³/ cm².with.

Suitable molded films and molded films comprising composite materials useful in the nonwoven layer of the present invention include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,342,314, U.S. Patent Application Ser. No. 08/326,571 and PCT Application US 95/07435; and No. 4,629,643. Further, the nonwoven layer may be formed from a shaped film of composite material comprising at least one shaped film and at least one nonwoven material, the layer being vacuum formed. A suitable molded sheet of composite material includes, but is not limited to, a vacuum laminated composite molded sheet material formed by combining a carded polypropylene nonwoven material having a basis weight of 30 g / m 2.² with molded foil.

137

Another preferred material suitable for the next layer is a web. Such a web preferably comprises synthetic materials. The term synthetic herein means that the materials are obtained primarily from a variety of man-made materials or natural materials that have been further altered. Suitable synthetic materials include, but are not limited to, acetate fibers, acrylic fibers, cellulose ester fibers, modacrylic fibers, polyamide fibers, polyester fibers, polyolefin fibers, polyvinyl alcohol fibers, rayon fibers, polyethylene foam, polyurethane foam, and the like. combinations thereof. Preferred synthetic materials, especially fibers, may be selected from the group consisting of nylon fibers, rayon fibers, polyolefin fibers, polyester fibers, and combinations thereof. Preferred polyolefin fibers are fibers selected from the group consisting of polyethylene, polypropylene, polybutylene, polypentene, and combinations and copolymers thereof. More preferred polyolefin fibers are fibers selected from the group consisting of polyethylene, polypropylene, and combinations and copolymers thereof. Preferred polyester fibers are fibers selected from the group consisting of polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polycyclohexylene dimethylene terephthalate, and combinations and copolymers thereof. More preferred polyester fibers are fibers selected from the group consisting of polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, and combinations and copolymers thereof. Most preferred synthetic fibers include solid staple polyester fibers that include polyethylene terephthalate homopolymers. Suitable synthetic materials may include fibers having a solid single component (i.e., be chemically homogeneous), fibers consisting of multiple components (ie having more than one type of material in each of the fibers), and fibers of multiple components (ie, synthetic fibers that include two or more

138 different types of fibers, which are somehow intertwined to form a larger fiber) and combinations thereof. Preferred fibers comprise bicomponent fibers, multi-component fibers, and combinations thereof. Such bicomponent fibers may have a core-sheath configuration or a side-to-side configuration. In either case, the web may comprise either a combination of fibers comprising the aforementioned materials or fibers comprising a combination of the aforementioned materials.

For core-sheath-preferred core fibers, they include materials selected from the group consisting of polyesters, polyolefins having a T_G at least 10 ° C higher than the sheath material and combinations thereof. Conversely, sheaths of bicomponent fibers preferably comprise materials selected from the group consisting of polyolefins having a T_G at least 10 ° C lower than the core material and combinations thereof.

In any case, i.e. in the side-to-side, core-sheath, or solid one-component arrangements, the webs of the web may have a helical or helical or crimped configuration, particularly in the two-component type of fibers.

Methods of condition conditioning, cosmetic delivery, polishing, dusting and cleaning of the surface in need of such treatment:

The present invention relates to methods of cleansing or conditioning the skin or hair condition with the personal care article of the present invention. The present invention further relates to methods of delivering a cosmetic agent to the skin and / or hair. The present invention also relates to domestic use such as polishing, dusting or cleaning a hard surface in need of such treatment. Each of these methods includes the following steps:

• fc fcfc fcfcfc fcfcfcfc

139

(a) optionally moistening with water a substantially dry disposable product of the present invention; and

(b) the contact of the surface in need of treatment with the moistened product by wiping or scrubbing.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The following examples further describe and show embodiments that are within the scope of the present invention. In the following examples, all components in the active concentration are listed. The examples are given purely by way of illustration and are not to be construed as limiting the present invention, as numerous modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The ingredients are indicated by their chemical or CTFA name.

I. Cleaning components:

Example 1

An exemplary cleaning component for the articles of the present invention is prepared as follows:

<td>Grate 53.0 g of soap bar, the following components:</td><td>which it contains</td>

<td>Folders</td><td>Weight %</td>

<td>Sodium cocylisethionate</td><td> 27,77</td>

<td>Paraffin</td><td> 16,72</td>

Sodium alkylglycerolsulfonate (AGS)

14,90

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0017.tif" />

140

Soaps 11.41

Glycerin 8.57

Water 5.50

Stearic acid 5.74

Sodium isethionate 3.04

NaCl 1.41

EDTA 0.10

Ethiopronic acid 0,10

Polyox 0.03

Perfume 0,70

Miscellaneous (including pigments) 4,01

Total 100

Cube soap shavings are mixed with 37.0 g glycerin (99.7%), 9.5 g water and 0.5 g perfume. The mixture was heated to 200 ° F (93.3 ° C) with stirring. The mixture is cold ground on a standard three-roll mill and stored as a cleaning component in a suitable sealed container.

Example 2 An exemplary cleaning component of the articles of the present invention is prepared as follows:

Grated with 40.0 g of cube soap containing ··

141 the following components:

Ingredients %

Sodium soap 52,40

Sodium alkylglycerol sulfonate (AGS) 16.50

Magnesium soap 13,40

Glycerin 0.19

Water 5.50

Stearic acid 1,60

Sodium isethionate 3.00

NaCl 3.89

EDTA 0.10

Etidronic acid 0.10

Perfume 0,70

Miscellaneous (including pigments) 2,62

Total 100

Cube soap shavings are mixed with 45.0 g glycerin (99.7%), 9.5 g water and 0.5 g perfume. The mixture was heated to 200 ° F (93.3 ° C) with stirring. The mixture is cold ground on a standard three-roll mill and stored as a cleaning component in a suitable sealed container.

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0018.tif" />

142

Example 3

An exemplary powdered cleaning component for the articles of the present invention is prepared as follows:

Grate 40.0 g of bar soap containing the following ingredients:

Folders

Soap (magnesium and sodium)

Water

Stearic acid

NaCl

EDTA

Perfume

Miscellaneous (including pigments)

Total

Weight %

80,16

11,50

5,70

1,10

0,25

1,15

0,14

100

The bar soap flakes are placed in a suitable sealed container.

Example 4

An exemplary powdered cleaning component for the articles of the present invention is prepared as follows:

Grate 40.0 g of bar soap containing the following ingredients:

• · 9 19 9 1 1191 • · ··· 1 1 11 11 9 • · · 9 9 1 11 1 · 1 1 1

<td></td><td> 19 11 9 1 9 9 9 1</td><td> • 11 1</td>

<td> 143</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Folders</td><td>Weight</td><td>O. O</td>

<td>Soap (magnesium and sodium)</td><td> 80,16</td><td></td>

<td>Water</td><td> 11,50</td><td></td>

<td>Stearic acid</td><td> 5,70</td><td></td>

<td>NaCl</td><td> 1,10</td><td></td>

<td>EDTA</td><td> 0,25</td><td></td>

<td>Perfume</td><td> 1,15</td><td></td>

<td>Miscellaneous (including pigments)</td><td> 0,14</td><td></td>

<td>Total</td><td> 100</td><td></td>

<td>The bar soap flakes are mixed with</td><td colspan="2">acid carbonate</td>

<td>sodium in a weight ratio of 90:10. Mixture</td><td>is ground twice</td><td>on</td>

<td>standard three-roll mill. Snowflakes with</td><td>collect and save</td><td>to</td>

suitable closed containers.

Example 5

An exemplary cleaning component for the articles of the present invention is prepared as follows: The cleaning component of Example 2 is mixed with 0.1 wt. protease enzyme bar soap flakes. Then the resulting mixture is mixed with 2 wt. the cleaners of dry hydrocolloid, sodium carboxymethylcellulose and milled. The cleaning component containing the enzyme is placed in a suitable sealed container.

· • 9 • 9·· • 9 9 99

9 ► 999 9

144

Example 6

An exemplary liquid cleaning component is prepared comprising the following components:

Ingredients %

Sodium cocoalkylglycerylsulfonate (AGS) 7.2

Ammonium lauryl sulfate (ALS) 10.4

Alkyl laureth sulfate (AE3S) 10.4

Polymers (ethylene oxide) (Polyox WSR N-3000, Union Carbide) 0.5

Xanthan gum 1,4

Water 70.1

Example 7

An exemplary cleaning component for the products of the present invention is prepared as follows:

Heat 3 pounds (1361 g) of the soap shavings of Example 2 with a cup of isopropyl alcohol (99%) until the soap melts. After melting the soap, the remaining alcohol is added. 10 ounces (283.5 g) of table sugar dissolved in as little water as possible are added. Add 4 teaspoons of dye to 8 ounces of glycerin. Glycerin (99.7%) is added and mixed. Heating is continued until the consistency is changed from a thin liquid to a drop of rolled-up strips while stirring, and an aliquot of the material hardens when it hits the cold surface. The mixture is poured into a suitable container where it is allowed to harden. The composition has the advantage that it can be remelted upon heating, which allows easy processing in the preparation of the articles.

145 • · *

4 4·· ·· ··

Example 8

An exemplary non-breaking liquid cleaning component is prepared comprising the following components:

Ingredients %

Cocoamidopropylbetain 17.1

Sodium trideceth sulphate 8.3

Sorbitan monooleate POE 100 7.5

Miscellaneous (including perfume, preservative, colorant) 2,0

Water 65.1

The distinguishing properties of this mixture are its non-irritating properties for skin and eyes.

Example 9

An exemplary liquid cleaning component is prepared which comprises

<td colspan="2">the following components:</td>

<td>Folders</td><td>Weight</td>

<td>Polyqaternium 10</td><td> 0,50</td>

<td>Sodium Lauroamfoacetate</td><td> 5,4</td>

<td>Sodium Laureth-3-sulfate</td><td> 11,6</td>

<td>Disodium-EDTA</td><td> 0,20</td>

Sodium citrate dihydrate

0,50 • ·«· • · • ··

146

Citric acid, anhydrous 1,0

PEG-6 Capillary / Carp Glycerides 2.0

Cocamide MEA 2.0

Glycerin 3,5

MgSO 4. 7 H₂O (Epsom salt) 1.5

Maleized soya oil 2,5

Deodorized soybean oil 5.0

Miscellaneous (including perfume, soda, color) 1,5

Water 62.8

The mixture is mild for use on sensitive skin.

Example 10

An exemplary liquid cleaning component is prepared by mixing the following components:

Ingredients %

Polyqaternium 10 0.1

Sodium sulphate 1.5

Lauryl alcohol 0,3

Sodium Laureth-3-sulfate 5.8

Citric acid, anhydrous

0,2 · · · · φ · · · · · · · · · ·

147

<td>Cocoamidopropylbetain</td><td> 15,5</td>

<td>Sodium Lauroylsarcosinate</td><td> 1,5</td>

<td>Miscellaneous (including perfume, blue dye)</td><td> 1,0</td>

<td>Water</td><td> 74,1</td>

<td>Example 11</td><td></td>

<td>An exemplary cleaning component is prepared Ingredients:</td><td>by mixing the following</td>

<td>Folders</td><td>Weight %</td>

<td>decylpolyglucose</td><td> 14,7</td>

<td>Kokamidopropylbetain</td><td> 14,7</td>

<td>Sodium Lauroylsarcosinate</td><td> 14,7</td>

<td>Polyquaternium-10</td><td> 1,1</td>

<td>Perfume</td><td> 1,0</td>

<td>Titanium dioxide</td><td> 0,5</td>

<td>Sodium benzoate</td><td> 0,3</td>

<td>Citric acid</td><td> 0,3</td>

<td>Disodium EDTA</td><td> 0,1</td>

Water

52,6

9 * » • * «

9 9 9» · 9 9

9 9 9

99 «9 »9

9 9 9

9 99

9 9 9

99

99

9 9 9

9 9

9 9

9999

148

Example 12

An exemplary cleaning component is prepared comprising the following components:

Ingredients %

EGDS __ 3.1

Cocoamidopropyl betaine 4.0

TEA soap (molecular weight about 330) 9.5

Monoalkyl phosphate 15.0

Cocaminoxide 7,5

1,2-propanediol 1.0

Ethanol 3.0

Miscellaneous (perfume, dye, preservative) 8,9

Water 48.0

The mixture is heated to 50 ° C, stirred continuously until the mixture loses 38% of its original weight and has a pasty consistency. The paste is preferably easy to process with the substrate layers and does not require further drying.

Example 13

An exemplary cleaning component is prepared comprising the following components:

·&gt;* »9

O 9 9 9 99 99

9 « · • · · ♦ » · 9 · · &lt;

9· ♦ · » 9 ♦ ·*·

149

Ingredients %

SEFA Cononate (SEFA stands for sucrose esters of 57.5 fatty acids)

Citric acid 0,30

Cocoamidopropyl betaine 3.5

Sodium Lauroylsarcosinate 10.7

Ethylene vinyl acetate polymer (Elvax 40W) 8.0

Silicone Polymer Microperules (Tospearly 145A) 20.0

The ethylene vinyl acetate polymer is melted into SEFA-cotonate at 90 ° C with vigorous stirring. Surfactant powders and citric acid were added and mixed. Silicone polymer microparticles are added, the mixture is stirred and allowed to cool to settle. The mixture is remelting and easily impregnated into or coated on the substrate layers.

Example 14

An exemplary cleaning component is prepared comprising the following components:

Ingredients %

Sodium Laureth-10-carboxylate (Empicol CB5S) available from 50.0 available from Albright &amp; Wilson

C12-14, 12EO alcohol ethoxylate (Empilan KB12) available 50.0 from Albright &amp; Wilson

150

9* *9 99 »9

9 9 999« 9999

9 499 9 9 99 9 9 9

99 999 99 999 9 9

9999 9994 994

99 4« 44 49 »494

The alcohol ethoxylate melts. The carboxylate is mixed until homogeneous. The mixture is then cooled to solidify until ready for use. The mixture is remelting and can easily be impregnated or coated.

Example 15

An exemplary cleaning component is prepared comprising the following components:

Ingredients %

C16-18, 150EO alcohol ethoxylate (Empilan KM50) available 22.0 from Albright &amp; Wilson

Cocamidopropyl betaine (Empigen BS) available from 20.0

Albright &amp; Wilson

MEA Laureth-3-ethoxylate sulfate (Marlinat MEA) 20.0

Citric acid, anhydrous

Sodium Lauroylsarcosinate 20.0

Propylene glycol 17.85

The mixture is heated to 70 ° C, stirred continuously to a pasty consistency. It cools until it solidifies and is ready for use.

Example 16

An exemplary cleaning component is prepared comprising the following components:

*

151

<td>Folders</td><td>Weight</td>

<td>Sodium Lauroylglutamate</td><td> 22,0</td>

<td>Kokamidopropylbetain</td><td> 2, 0</td>

<td>Sodium chloride</td><td> 1,0</td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 2, 5</td>

<td>Water</td><td> 72,5</td>

The ingredients are heated together with gentle stirring until homogeneous.

Example 17

An exemplary cleaning component is prepared comprising the following components:

Ingredients %

Triethanolamine (TEA) 2.9

Polyquaternium-39 0.1

Monolauryl phosphate 4.0

C 12 -C 14 N-methylglucosamide available from Hoechst 5.0 Celanese

Cocamidopropylhydroxysultain available from Rhone 2.0 Poulenc

Sodium decyl sulfate 0,5

Citric acid monohydrate

0,3 • · • · • * · • · · ·· ·· • · · • ··

152

Perfume, Protective Equipment and Miscellaneous 4.0

Water 81.2

The ingredients are added slowly in the following order at 60 ° C until each is dissolved in water: TEA, monolauryl phosphate, glucosoamide. Cool to 45 ° C and add sultain, polyquaternium-39 and sulfate while stirring as before. Perfume, preservatives are added and cooled to room temperature.

Example 18

An exemplary cleaning component is prepared by mixing the following components:

Ingredients %

Lauroyl polyglucose available as Plantaren 1200 at 20.0 from Henkel

Cetyltrimethylammonium bromide 4.0

Perfume, Protective Equipment and Miscellaneous 4.0

Water 72.0

Example 19

An exemplary cleaning component is prepared by mixing the following components:

• · • ·

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0019.tif" />

153

<td>Folders</td><td>Weight</td>

<td>Decylpolyglucose</td><td> 14,8</td>

<td>Kokamidopropylbetain</td><td> 14,8</td>

<td>Sodium Lauroylsarcosinate</td><td> 14,8</td>

<td>Butylene glycol</td><td> 3,6</td>

<td>PEG 14M</td><td> 1/8</td>

<td>Polyquaternium-10</td><td> 0/9</td>

<td>Dex panthenol</td><td> 0/7</td>

<td>Phenoxyethanol</td><td> 0,5</td>

<td>Benzyl alcohol</td><td> 0,5</td>

<td>Methylparaben</td><td> 0,45</td>

<td>Propylparaben</td><td> 0,25</td>

<td>Disodium EDTA</td><td> 0,2</td>

<td>Water</td><td> 55,1</td>

Example 20

An exemplary antibacterial cleaning component is prepared by mixing the following components:

Ingredients %

Dimethikon

0,5 • · · · · ·· · ·

·. ····*’· · : :: : *: : ·*

·..··..· .......

154

<td>Ammonium lauryl sulfate</td><td> 0,6</td>

<td>Glucono-delta-lactone</td><td> 2,27</td>

<td>Propylene glycol</td><td> 0,5</td>

<td>Triklosan</td><td> 0,15</td>

<td>Sodium benzoate</td><td> 0,2</td>

<td>Tetrasodium EDTA</td><td> 0,1</td>

<td>Silicone polyether</td><td> 0,4</td>

<td>Scent</td><td> 0,03</td>

<td>SD alcohol 40</td><td> 10</td>

<td>Sodium hydroxide</td><td> 0-2</td>

<td>Water</td><td>residue</td>

Example 21

An exemplary antibacterial cleaning component is prepared by mixing the following components:

Ingredients %

Dimethikon 0,5

Ammonium lauryl sulfate 0.6

Glucono-delta-lactone 2.27

PPG-15 stearyl ether 0,5 • ·

155 ♦ · ·· » · * » · · ·· • · ·

B · ·

Triklosan

Sodium benzoate

Dimethikon

Tetrasodium EDTA

Sodium chloride

SD alcohol 40

Sodium hydroxide

Scent

Water

0,15

0,2

0,03

0,1

0,4

0-2

0.01 residue

II Conditioning components:

Examples 22 to 26

An exemplary skin conditioning ingredient is prepared by mixing the following ingredients:

<td>Components [wt. %]</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td>

<td></td><td> 22</td><td> 23</td><td> 24</td><td> 25</td><td> 26</td>

<td>SEFA-cotonate * '</td><td> 48,0</td><td> 75,0</td><td> 33,5</td><td> 40,0</td><td> 80,0</td>

<td>SEFA behenate * '</td><td> 12,0</td><td> 25,0</td><td> 8,4</td><td> 10,0</td><td> 10,0</td>

<td>Petrolatum</td><td> 10,0</td><td> —</td><td> 7,0</td><td></td><td> —</td>

Glyceryltribenenát

5,0

3,5

156 • ·· Σ · · · · · ·

·..··..· ·.. ........

<td>Stearyl alcohol</td><td></td><td> —</td><td> 5,0</td><td> —</td>

<td>Paraffin</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 5,0</td><td> -</td>

<td>Cholesterolester 25.0</td><td> -</td><td> 17,5</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>Ozokerite wax</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 10,0</td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> -</td><td> 28,0</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>Triglycerilmono- stearate</td><td></td><td> 1,9</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>Dekaglycerildi- palmitate</td><td> -</td><td> 0,2</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>Nonylphenol polyglycine- - ether⁺⁾</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 30,0</td><td> -</td>

*) SEFA stands for sucrose fatty acid esters

Hamplex TNP, Hampshire Chemical Co.

Examples 27 to 31

<td>Preparation exemplary of the following components:</td><td>folders</td><td colspan="2">for conditioning</td><td>skin</td>

<td>Components [wt. %]</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td>

<td></td><td> 27</td><td> 28</td><td> 29</td><td> 30</td>

<td>Petrolatum (white)</td><td> 35,87</td><td> 35,87</td><td> —</td><td></td>

mixing

Example

34,0

Mineral oil

11,0

13, 0

10,0 ·· ·· ··. **·. · » ·

<td colspan="2"> • • • • •</td><td rowspan="2"> • 4 • 4 44 4 4 · · • 4 · 4 ··</td><td rowspan="2">• · ·· ·! • I · • · · · ·· ·· ♦ · 4,5</td><td rowspan="2"> 9 4 • • · · ·</td>

<td>Jojoba oil</td><td> 157</td>

<td>Castor oil 10.0</td><td> 9,0</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td></td>

<td>Cocoa butter</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 5,0</td>

<td>Diisostearyltri- 20.0 methylpropansiloxy- Silicate</td><td> 20,0</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Polydimethylsiloxane -</td><td> -</td><td> 0,7</td><td> 1,5</td><td></td>

<td>500 cSt liquid</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Dekamethylcyklopenta- - siloxane</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 16,5</td><td></td>

<td>Octamethylcyclotetra- - siloxane</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 10,0</td><td></td>

<td>Polydimethylsiloxane, rubber</td><td> -</td><td> 5,9</td><td> 7,5</td><td></td>

<td>Stearylmethikonový wax</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 3,0</td><td></td>

<td>Polybuten</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 4,5</td><td></td>

<td>Caramel wax 4.6</td><td> 4,6</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 6,0</td>

<td>Paraffin wax</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 15,0</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>Microcristal wax -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 6,0</td><td> 4,0</td>

<td>Beeswax 3.0</td><td> 3,0</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 4,0</td>

<td>Ozokerite wax 6.0</td><td> 6,0</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td></td>

• ·

<td colspan="3"> 9 9 9 9</td><td rowspan="2">• ···! : • · · . ·· .. · ···</td><td rowspan="2"> • 9 · 9 · • 9 · · • 9 ··</td><td rowspan="2"> • • 9···</td>

<td colspan="2"></td><td> 158</td>

<td>Carnauba wax</td><td> 3,0</td><td> 3,0</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td></td>

<td>Hydrogenated Castor oil</td><td> 0,50</td><td> 0, 50</td><td> 4,0</td><td> -</td><td></td>

<td>Silica</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 4,5</td><td></td>

<td>Sodium silicate magnesium</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 1,5</td><td></td>

<td>Tocopherol</td><td> 0,03</td><td> 0, 03</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td></td>

<td>Cyklomethikon</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 59,0</td><td> -</td><td></td>

<td>Stearyl alcohol</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 25,5</td><td> -</td><td> 9,0</td>

<td>Cetyl alcohol</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 9,0</td>

<td>Glyceryl stearate</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 2,6</td><td> -</td><td></td>

<td>Acetylated monoglyceride Diisostearyl maleate¹’</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 6,0</td><td> 15,1</td>

<td>Glyceryldistearate</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 9,5</td><td></td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 6,0</td><td></td>

<td>Water</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 3,0</td><td></td>

<td>Nonylphenol polyglycine ther²⁾</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 5,0</td><td> -</td><td></td>

<td>Micronized oxide titaničitý</td><td></td><td> 5,0</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td></td>

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0020.tif" />

159

Octylmethoxycinnamate 5.0

Fragrances and Miscellaneous 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0

1) Available as Myvacet 7-07, roughly half acetylated, from Eastman Chemical Co.

2) Available as Hamplex TNP, available from Hampshire Chemical Co.

Example 32

An exemplary skin conditioning ingredient is prepared by mixing the following ingredients:

Components [wt. Example 32

Polydecen¹’ 53,3

Stearyl alcohol 7,7

12-hydroxystearic acid 13.5

Nonylphenol polyglycine ether 25.0

Octylmethoxycinnamate 1.5

1) Puresyn 3000 from Mobil Chemical Co.

Examples 33 to 35

An exemplary skin conditioning ingredient is prepared by mixing the following ingredients:

• 4 • 4 4

44

160

<td>Components [wt. %]</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td>

<td></td><td> 33</td><td> 34</td><td> 35</td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 95,0</td><td> 95,0</td><td> 94,0</td>

<td>Decaglyceryldipalmitate¹’</td><td> 5, 0</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 5, 0</td>

<td>Decaglyceryldibehenate</td><td></td><td> 4,0</td><td></td>

<td>Tribehenin</td><td></td><td></td><td> 1,0</td>

1) available as Polyaldo 10-2-P from Lonza

Examples 36 to 40

<td>Exemplary folder on</td><td>conditioning</td><td>for products</td><td>according to</td><td>subject</td>

<td>of the invention is prepared</td><td>following</td><td>as follows:</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Components [wt. %]</td><td colspan="2">Example Example Example</td><td colspan="2">Example Example</td>

<td></td><td> 36 37</td><td> 38</td><td> 39</td><td> 40</td>

<td></td><td>Hydrophobic</td><td>phase</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>SEFA * 'cotonate</td><td> 4,65 4,65</td><td> 15,5</td><td> 15, 5</td><td></td>

<td>SEFA * 'behenate</td><td> 0,35 0,35</td><td> 8,0</td><td> 8,0</td><td></td>

<td>Tribehenin</td><td></td><td> 6,0</td><td> 6,0</td><td></td>

<td>Petrolatum</td><td></td><td> 4,0</td><td> 4,0</td><td> 4,4</td>

<td>Cocoa butter</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 15,5</td>

<td>C10-C30 Cholesterol /</td><td></td><td> 13,0</td><td> 13,0</td><td></td>

lanosterol esters¹’ ·· • ·

161 • ♦ · • · ··· • · · • · *

9· ·· • 9 ·* » 9 1 * &lt;

<td>Polyglyceryl-4- isostearate and cetyldimethikon a hexyllaurate²¹</td><td> 5,0</td><td> 5,0</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>PEG 30</td><td></td><td> 3,0</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Dipolyhydroxystearate³’</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Tetraglycerylmono- stearate</td><td></td><td></td><td> 2,1</td><td></td>

<td>Dekaglyceryldi- palmitate</td><td></td><td></td><td> 0, 90</td><td></td>

<td>Ceresin wax</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 5,5</td>

<td>Beeswax</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 7,0</td>

<td>Lecithin, pure</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 10, 0</td>

<td>1-monostearine</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 10,0</td>

<td></td><td colspan="2">Hydrophilic phase</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 70,0</td><td> 66,5 42,30</td><td> 42, 30</td><td> 40,0</td>

<td>Water</td><td></td><td> 3,5</td><td></td><td> 5,0</td>

PVM / MA decadine 0.25 0.25 crosslinked polymer⁴¹

Sodium hydroxide 0.25 0.25 (10% solution)

Gelatine

2, 6 • * β β β β β β β β β β β β β β β β β,,

162

Active skin care agents:

<td>Panthenol 20.0</td><td> 10,0</td><td> 2,50</td><td></td>

<td>Nicotinamide</td><td> 5,0</td><td> 2,50</td><td> 3,0</td>

<td>Urea</td><td> 5,0</td><td> 2, 50</td><td> 2,50</td>

<td>Alantoin</td><td></td><td> 0,20</td><td> 0,20</td>

<td>Acetamidopropyltrimon</td><td></td><td></td><td> 2,0</td>

iumchlorid

*) SEFA stands for sucrose fatty acid esters

1) available as AMS-C30 from Dow Corning

2) available as Abil WE-09 from Goldschmidt

3) Available as Arlacel P135 from ICI

4) Available as Stabileze 06 from ISP

Method for all emulsions:

The hydrophobic phase is heated to 70 ° C, hydrophobic active ingredients are added to the skin and mixed until homogeneous. The hydrophilic phase ingredients are premixed with the hydrophilic skin care active ingredients, and are warmed slightly if necessary to dissolve or disperse. They are slowly added to the hydrophobic phase while stirring is continued. Homogenize with a high shear mixer, an ultrasonic homogenizer or a high pressure homogenizer such as Microfluidizer from Microfluidics Corp.). It is immediately applied to the surface of the substrate or rapidly cooled below room temperature in ice or water with ice. It is stored in a controlled way

163 under nitrogen, if required for chemical stability.

Examples 41 to 45

An exemplary conditioning component as described in Examples 36 to 40 is prepared using the following components:

<td>Components [wt. %]</td><td colspan="2">Example Example Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td>

<td></td><td> 41 42</td><td> 43</td><td> 44</td><td> 45</td>

<td></td><td>Hydrophobic</td><td>phase</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>SEFA * 'cotonate</td><td></td><td> 15,0</td><td> 16,0</td><td></td>

<td>SEFA *^F behenate</td><td></td><td> 7,5</td><td> 4,0</td><td></td>

<td>Tribehenin</td><td></td><td> 6,0</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Petrolatum</td><td></td><td> 4,0</td><td> 4,0</td><td> 4,4</td>

<td>Cocoa butter</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 15,5</td>

<td>Polydecen¹⁾</td><td> 50, 0 46,5</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>C10-C30 Cholesterol /</td><td></td><td> 13,0</td><td> 10,5</td><td></td>

<td>lanosterol esters</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>PEG 30</td><td></td><td> 3,0</td><td> 3,0</td><td></td>

<td>Dipolyhydroxystearate</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Ceresin wax</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 5,5</td>

<td>Beeswax</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 7,0</td>

Hydroxystearate

7,5 ·♦ • 9 *·

9 • · · a · a a a a a a a a a a 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99

·· »« 9999

164 aluminum-magnesium in mineral oil^2&gt;

C30-38 olefin / isopropyl maleate copolymer³⁾

Polyethylene wax⁴’

Lecithin, purified

Fragrances and various

1-monostearine

2,5

1,0

10,0

1,0

10,0

Hydrophilic phase

Glycerine

Water

PEG 2000

30,0 25,0

34,80 20,0

8,0

8,0

38,0

5,0

17,0

PVM / MA decade crosslink polymer⁴’

Sodium hydroxide (10% solution)

Sodium hydroxide (10% solution)

0,25

0,25

0,25

Gelatine

9,50 9,50

0,25

2,6

Active skin care agents:

Nicotinamide

2,50

165 «» ··

,. · «,, · ,,... i «« ·· · • ·· i · Ϊ&gt; · · · *.

• · · · *·· ► · ··*· ,, *· ♦* ··

Menthol in 50% beta-cyclodextrin

Ascorbic acid (natural)

Tocopherol (natural)

Sorbitol

Lactic acid 2,5

Urea

Alantoin

Triklosan

Chlorhexidine

Benzoyl peroxide

15% salicylic acid in PPG 14 butyl ether

Salicylic acid

2,50

2,50

1,00

2,50

2,50

0,20

5,0

2,5

2,50

12,0

1, 50

0,50

*) SEFA stands for sucrose fatty acid esters

1) available as Puresyn 3000 from Mobil

2) available as Gilugel Min from Giulini Chemie

3) Available as Performa 1608 from New Phase Technologies

4) Available as Performalene 400 from New Phase Technologies

166

Examples 46 to 50

An exemplary conditioning component as described in the Examples

<td colspan="4">36 to 40 are prepared using the following</td><td colspan="2">Ingredients:</td>

<td>Components [wt. %]</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td colspan="2">Example Example</td><td>Example</td>

<td></td><td> 46</td><td> 47</td><td> 48</td><td> 49</td><td> 50</td>

<td></td><td colspan="3">Hydrophobic phase</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>SEFA * 'cotonate</td><td> 20,5</td><td> 15,5</td><td></td><td></td><td> 16,0</td>

<td>Mineral oil</td><td></td><td></td><td> 7,50</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>SEFA * 'behenate</td><td> 8,0</td><td> 8,0</td><td></td><td></td><td> 8,0</td>

<td>Tribehenin</td><td> 9,5</td><td> 6,0</td><td></td><td></td><td> 6,0</td>

<td>Petrolatum (white or</td><td> 4,0</td><td> 4,0</td><td> 22,6</td><td> 3,0</td><td> 4,0</td>

<td>super white)</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Caramel wax</td><td></td><td></td><td> 4,50</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Paraffin wax</td><td></td><td></td><td> 3,00</td><td> 14,0</td><td></td>

<td>Microcrystalline wax</td><td></td><td></td><td> 1,50</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Beeswax</td><td></td><td></td><td> 3,00</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>C10-C30 Cholesterol /</td><td> 18,0</td><td> 13,0</td><td></td><td></td><td> 13,0</td>

<td>lanosterol esters</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

Laurylmethi con copolyol¹’

5, 0 * · · · · · · « · · ·· · · · ··· · · «

<td colspan="2"></td><td> 167</td><td> ·· ·· ·· ··</td><td> • · · ·</td>

<td>Acetylated monoglyceride²’</td><td></td><td></td><td> 11,3</td><td></td>

<td>Stearyl alcohol</td><td></td><td></td><td> 6, 8</td><td></td>

<td>CetyláTkohol</td><td></td><td></td><td> 6,8</td><td></td>

<td>PEG 30</td><td> 4,5</td><td> 3, 0</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Dipolyhydroxystearate</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Dekaglyceryldi- palmitate³’</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 0,90</td>

<td>Tetraglyceryl- monostearate</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 2,10</td>

<td>Fragrances, different</td><td> 1,0</td><td></td><td> 3,0 2,0</td><td></td>

<td></td><td colspan="2">Hydrophilic</td><td>phase</td><td></td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 22,8</td><td> 27,5</td><td> 25,0 38,0</td><td> 41,0</td>

<td>Dekaglyceryldi- palmitate³’</td><td> 2,5</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Microspheres</td><td></td><td> 15,0</td><td></td><td></td>

calcium silicate⁴¹

Active skin care agents:

Guarhydroxypropyltrimonium chloride

1,00

168

<td colspan="2">Chitosanglykolát</td><td colspan="4"> 2,50</td>

<td>Nicotinamide</td><td> 1, 50</td><td> 2,50</td><td> 2,50</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>0.2% Carbopol 940</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 38,0</td><td></td>

<td>aqueous solution, pH 6.0</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Mentor in 50%</td><td></td><td> 2,50</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>betacyclodextrin</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Retinol</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 2,50</td>

<td>Phytantriol⁵¹</td><td> 1,00</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Urea</td><td> 2,50</td><td> 3,0</td><td> 2, 50</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Vitamin C</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 2,50</td>

<td>Borage oil</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 2,50</td>

<td>Ascorbyl palmitate</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 1,50</td>

<td>Acetamidopropyltrimon iumchlorid^6&gt;</td><td> 2,50</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

*) SEFA stands for sucrose fatty acid esters

1) Available as Dow Q2-5200, Dow Corning

2) available as Myvacet 7-07, about half acetylated from Eastman Chemical Co.

3) Available as Polyaldo 10-2-P from Lonza

4) Available as Celite C from Celite Co.

5) Available as Hydagen CMF from Henkel

169

6) Available as Incromectant AQ from Croda

Example 47: Glycerin is incorporated into microspheres, then mixed into the molten lipid phase and cooled for storage or applied to a substrate.

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0021.tif" />

·· ·· · · · ♦ ····

170

Examples 51 to 56

An exemplary conditioning component as described in Examples 36 to 40 is prepared using the following components:

<td>Folders</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td colspan="2">Example Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td>

<td>[wt. %]</td><td> 51</td><td> 52</td><td> 53</td><td> 54</td><td> 55</td><td> 56</td>

<td></td><td></td><td colspan="2">Hydrophobic</td><td>phase</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>SEFA * ' kotonát</td><td> 16, 0</td><td> 16,0</td><td> 16,0</td><td> 16,0</td><td> 16,0</td><td> 16, 0</td>

<td>SE FA * ' behenate</td><td></td><td> 8,0</td><td> 8,0</td><td> 8,0</td><td> 8,0</td><td> 8,0</td>

<td>Tribehenin</td><td> 6,0</td><td> 6,0</td><td> 6,0</td><td> 6, 0</td><td> 6, 0</td><td> 6,0</td>

<td>Petrolatum (white or super white)</td><td> 4,0</td><td> 4,0</td><td> 4,0</td><td> 4,0</td><td> 4,0</td><td> 4,0</td>

<td>C10-C30</td><td> 13,0</td><td> 13,0</td><td> 13,0</td><td> 13,0</td><td> 13,0</td><td> 13,0</td>

cholesterol / lanosterol esters

Stearyl-2,0 dimethicone

Dimethicone-4.0 hydroxystearate

171

<td>Dimethikon- copolyol- behenate</td><td> 2,0</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>PEG 30 Dipoly- hydroxy- stearate</td><td></td><td></td><td> 3,0</td><td></td><td> 3,0</td><td></td>

<td>Lauroyl- glutamate sodium</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 2,00</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Stearoyl- laktylát sodium</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 2,00</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Stearate Calcium</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 5,0</td>

<td>Decaglyceryl dipalmitate</td><td> 0, 90</td><td> 0,90</td><td></td><td> 0,90</td><td></td><td> 0, 90</td>

<td>Tetraglyce- rylmono- stearate</td><td> 2,10</td><td> 2,10</td><td></td><td> 2,10</td><td></td><td> 2,10</td>

<td>Fragrances, different</td><td> 1,00</td><td> 1,00</td><td> 1,00</td><td> 1,00</td><td> 1,00</td><td> 1,00</td>

<td></td><td></td><td colspan="2">Hydrophilic</td><td>phase</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 44,5</td><td> 42, 5</td><td> 35,5</td><td> 35,5</td><td> 25,0</td><td> 43, 0</td>

4444

172

<td>75% poly- ethylenimine in the water,</td><td></td><td> 4,50</td><td> 4,50</td>

<td>pH 6.5</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Water</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Decaglyceryl dipalmitate</td><td></td><td> 2,50</td><td> 2,50</td>

<td>Smoke silica</td><td></td><td></td><td> 20,0</td>

<td>Propylene- glycol- alginate²’</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td></td><td>Active substances</td><td colspan="2">for skin care:</td>

<td>Nicotinamide</td><td> 2,00</td><td></td><td> 2,00</td>

<td>Chitosan</td><td> 1,50</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Extract green of tea</td><td> 4,50</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Aloe vera gel Vitamin C</td><td> 3,0</td><td> 2,50</td><td></td>

<td>Ascorbyl-</td><td></td><td> 2,00</td><td> 2, 50</td>

2,0

2,0 palmitate

0· 00

Acetamidopropyl trimonium chloride

173

2,00

2, 00

*) SEFA stands for sucrose fatty acid esters

1) available as Epomin SP-018 from Nippon Shokubai Co.

2) available as Kelcoloid from Kelco

Examples 57 to 59

An exemplary conditioning component for the products of the present invention is prepared as follows:

<td>Components [wt. %]</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td>

<td></td><td> 57</td><td> 58</td><td> 59</td>

<td></td><td>Hydrophobic phase</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Lecithin, purified¹*</td><td> 15,4</td><td> 10,3</td><td> 10,8</td>

<td>Dean</td><td> 28,6</td><td> 19,2</td><td> 15,0</td>

<td>Mineral oil</td><td></td><td></td><td> 5,0</td>

<td>Tricontanyl PVP²⁾</td><td></td><td></td><td> 26, 0</td>

<td>Stearyl alcohol</td><td></td><td> 13,0</td><td></td>

12-hydroxystearic acid

19, 4 • fc fcfcfcfc fcfcfcfc • fcfcfc fcfc ·· fcfc · • fc

<td colspan="4"> 174</td>

<td></td><td>Hydrophilic phase</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 28,0</td><td> 18,8</td><td> 19, 6</td>

<td>Propylene glycol</td><td> 28,0</td><td> 18,8</td><td> 19, 6</td>

<td>Active</td><td colspan="2">skin care ingredients</td><td></td>

<td>Triklosan</td><td></td><td> 0,20</td><td></td>

<td>Salicylic acid</td><td></td><td> 0,40</td><td></td>

<td>Nicotinamide</td><td></td><td></td><td> 4,0</td>

<td colspan="2">1) available as Epicuron 200 from Lucas</td><td>Meyer</td><td></td>

2) available as Ganex WP-660 from ISP

All components are mixed together until a microemulsion is formed. The skin care ingredients are first added to the phase closest to their solubility parameter. When the waxes are added, heating up to the melting point of the wax is performed, dispersed by stirring and added to the substrate or cooled to room temperature and stored.

Examples 60 to 62

An exemplary conditioning component for the products of the present invention is prepared as follows:

175

Components [wt. %] • · • · 1

Example Example Example

<td></td><td> 60</td><td> 61</td><td> 62</td>

<td>Hydrophobic</td><td>phase</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Isohexadekan</td><td> 42,29</td><td> 43,0</td><td> 28,3</td>

<td>Sodium dioctylsulfosuccinate^2&gt;</td><td> 10, 62</td><td> 7,0</td><td> 7,1</td>

<td>Hydrophilic</td><td>phase</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 35,17</td><td> 19,0</td><td> 23, 6</td>

<td>Water</td><td> 11,72</td><td> 19,0</td><td> 7,8</td>

<td>Carnauba wax</td><td></td><td></td><td> 29,0</td>

<td>Gelatine</td><td></td><td> 6, 0</td><td></td>

Active ingredients for skin care

Triklosan 0.20

Titanium dioxide, cosmetic 4.2

Titanium dioxide, micronized 4,2

Salicylic acid 1,8

1) available as Epicuron 200 from Lucas Meyer

2) available as Aerosol OT from Pfaltz and Bauer

First, the skin care ingredients are added to the phase closest to their solubility parameter. Then all the ingredients are mixed together until a microemulsion is formed. The mixture is then applied as a coating to the surface of the substrate.

• 9 9 9 99

9 9 99

176

Examples 63 to 68

An exemplary conditioning component for the products of the present invention is prepared as follows:

<td>Folders [wt. %]</td><td>Example 63</td><td>Example 64</td><td>Example 65</td><td>Example 66</td><td>Example 67</td><td>Example 68</td>

<td></td><td></td><td></td><td>Part A</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Lauroylether Sodium (SLES) add as 27% active component</td><td> 15,0</td><td> 6,51</td><td> 6,20</td><td></td><td></td><td> 5,9</td>

<td>Kokamido- propyl- betaine¹’</td><td> 13,5</td><td> 5,85</td><td> 5,57</td><td> 5,82</td><td> 5,19</td><td> 5,3</td>

<td>Lauroyl- sarcosinate sodium²’</td><td> 1,35</td><td> 0, 60</td><td> 0,57</td><td> 6,01</td><td> 5,36</td><td> 0,54</td>

<td>Decylpolyglu goat³’</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 5,80</td><td> 5,18</td><td></td>

<td>Lauryl- alcohol</td><td> 1,31</td><td> 0,56</td><td> 0,54</td><td></td><td></td><td> 0,54</td>

<td>Polyethylene-</td><td> 7,87</td><td> 3,38</td><td> 3,22</td><td> 2,64</td><td> 2,36</td><td> 3,2</td>

4) ímirr

177 • · • · ·· • · • ·· ·· ·· ·· ·♦ ·· ···«

0,32 Citric acid

0,11 0,11

0.09 (added as 50% aqueous solution) Tetrasodium-0.28 EDTA

<td>Acid sulfuric</td><td> 5,4</td><td> 2,37</td><td> 2,25</td><td></td>

<td>Protective means, scent</td><td> 0, 62</td><td> 0,45</td><td> 0, 43</td><td> 2,86</td>

<td>Sodium sulfate</td><td> 7,9</td><td> 3,47</td><td> 3,21</td><td></td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 26,45</td><td> 56,7</td><td> 46,4</td><td> 44,1</td>

<td>Sorbitol</td><td></td><td></td><td> 5,0</td><td></td>

SEFA * cotonate

SEFA * behenate

2,2

2,55 0,3

3,0

39,36 44,8

12,8

8,0

Part B - Polymeric gelling agents

Gelatine

4,2 • 4 4 444 • 4 4 4« · · · · · · ·

4· · · · · · ·

178

Polyacrylic 7.5 amide and isoparaffin⁵

Polyurethane latex v

50% isopropanol⁶

Polyacrylate-7.5 copolymer⁷

Polystyrene-1,1 sulfonate copolymer⁸

Chitosan-5,4 lactate

34,1

Part C - Physical Gelling Agents

12-hydroxy-10,0 stearic acid

10, 66

Stearyl- 10,0 20,0 20,0 7,11 15,0 alcohol * SEFA stands for sucrose fatty acid esters

1) available as Tegobetaine F from Goldschmidt

2) available as Hamposyl L-30 (type 721) from Hampshire

44 4 4 44 4

4 44 4 4 4

4· · · 4444

179

Chemical, 31% active

3) available as Plantaren 2000NP from Henkel

4) available as Epomin SP-018, molecular weight about 1800, from Nippon Shokubai Co.

5) available as Carbopol Ultrez from BFGoodrich

6) available as Sancure 2710 from BFGoodrich, prepared as a premix comprising about 20% polymer, 30% water, 50% IPA

6) available as Sepigel 305 from Seppic Corp.

7) Available as AQ38S from Eastman Chemical

Surfactants and fatty alcohol are mixed in a low speed rotor mixer while heating to 65 ° C. Stop heating and allow the mixture to cool to 65⁰ with continued stirring. Add the cationic polymer and mix until homogeneous. The remaining components of Part A are added slowly with stirring. It is homogenized to disperse SEFA as an emulsion. It is then titrated with concentrated sulfuric acid until a pH of about 6.5 is reached. prepare a dry mixture by spreading the mixture of part A in trays and drying in a suitable (vacuum or convection) oven at a temperature not exceeding 65 ° C until substantially no water remains. The dried components of Part A are mixed with the polymeric gelling agents of Part B, heated until they dissolve or disperse. The resulting mixture is mixed with physical gelling agents. Heat and dissolve the gelling agents into the mixture. The mixture is applied to the surface or surfaces of the substrate or cooled to room temperature and stored.

• ·

4« &gt; · 4 ► 4 4 44

180

Examples 69 to 74

<td colspan="4">Exemplary conditioning component for The invention is prepared as is 68 using the following components:</td><td>Ware described in</td><td colspan="2">according to the subject Examples 63 through</td>

<td>Folders [mass ·%]</td><td>Example 69</td><td colspan="2">Example Example 70 71</td><td>Example 72</td><td colspan="2">Example Example 73 74</td>

<td></td><td></td><td></td><td>Part A</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Lauroyl- sarcosinate sodium¹</td><td> 8,87</td><td></td><td></td><td> 11,4</td><td> 10, 8</td><td> 10, 8</td>

<td>Polyethylene- imin²</td><td> 7,39</td><td> 7,50</td><td> 7,50</td><td> 9,5</td><td> 9,0</td><td> 9,0</td>

<td>Water</td><td> 4,43</td><td> 3,00</td><td> 3, 00</td><td> 5,7</td><td> 5,4</td><td> 5,4</td>

<td>Acid sulfuric</td><td> 6,36</td><td>QS</td><td>QS</td><td> 8,1</td><td> 7,7</td><td> 7,7</td>

<td>Fragrances, different</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 34,45</td><td> 52,5</td><td> 45, 0</td><td> 41, 3</td><td> 39,25</td><td> 34,25</td>

<td>Propylene- glycol</td><td> 2,50</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Urea</td><td></td><td> 2,50</td><td> 2,50</td><td> 2,0</td><td> 1,9</td><td> 1,9</td>

<td>Panthenol</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 2,0</td><td> 1,9</td><td> 1,9</td>

<td>Nicotinamide</td><td></td><td> 2,50</td><td> 2,50</td><td> 2,0</td><td> 1,9</td><td> 1,9</td>

· «·· ·· * e? 99 99 * 9 1 9 9 99 99 9 9

9 · 999 99 · · 9 9 · * · 9 9 9999 99· ·* ·· *· 9· 99 9999

181

Salicylic acid

Polymethylsilsesquioxan³

Mica sparkling

Stearylmethicone wax

4,20 4,20

3,85 3,85

5,0

SEFA kotonát

Petrolatum

5, 0

5,0

Part B - Polymeric gelling agents

Gelatine

Polyacrylic 16.0 12.0 12.0 amide a

0,1 isoparaffin⁴

Part C - Physical gelling agents

12-hydroxy-12.0 12.0 10.5 stearic acid

Carnauba wax

18,0 14,1 14,1 »4 ·· *9 «9 9* *4 • 44 · · » » *44» • 444« · 4 4» 4 4 4

4 4 ··* · 4 * » « « 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4·· ·» *· ' * 44 44 4444

182

Stearyl- 8.0 8.0 7.0 alcohol

1) available as Hamposyl L-95 from Hampshire Chemical, dry

2) available as Epomin SP-018, molecular weight about 1800, from Nippon Shokubai Co.

3) Available as Tospearl 145A from Kobo, Inc.

4) Available as Sepigel 305 from Seppic Corp.

Examples 75 to 78

An exemplary conditioning composition is prepared containing the following ingredients:

an ingredient for the skin that

Components [wt. %]

SEFA * cotonate

Petrolatum

Stearyl alcohol

Stearic acid

Lanolin

Ethylene vinyl acetate polymer¹

Polydecen²

Example

4,0

3,0

Example

62,0

20,0

10,0

Example

52,0

4,5

13,0

10,0

2,0

Example

2,0 ··· ···· · · · · ····· · · ·· ·· ·

183

Sodium Lauroylsarcosinate³ 25,0

Laurylbetain⁴

Lauroamfoacetate⁵

Sodium Laureth-3-sulfate⁶

Kokamid MEA⁷

Sulfuric acid QS

Guarhydroxypropyltrimonium- 0.50 chloride

Cholesterol⁸ 9,0

Nonylphenol polyglycinether⁹

Micronized titanium dioxide

Octylmethoxycinnamate

Nicotinamide

Glycerin 10.0

Water 48.5

PEG 6 caprylic / carp glycerides

Maleized soybean oil

Soybean oil (deodorized)

Palm kernel fatty acids

3,00 3,0

1,50 2,0

5,25

10, 5

2,80

0,50

1,0

5, 0

4,0

4.0

2,5

3,00

55, 95

3,40

1,50

8,0

2,60

184

Polyquaternium-10 0.40

Scent, preservatives, 4.60 different * SEFA stands for sucrose fatty acid esters

1) available as Elvax 40 W from DuPont

2) Available as Puresyn 3000 from Mobil

3) Available eg as Hamposyl L95 (solid) or L30 (30% active ingredient in water) from Hampshire Chemical

4) Available as Empigen BS98 from Albright &amp; Wilson (80% betaine, 20% salt)

5) Available as Empigen CDL60 from Albright &amp; Wilson

6) Available as Empicol ESC3 from Albright &amp; Wilson

7) Available as Empilan CME / G from Albright &amp; Wilson

8) Available as Super Hartolan from Croda

9) Hampex TNP, Hampshire Chemical Co. Ltd.

The lipid components are melted, water (if necessary) and a humectant or humectants are added, the surfactant is added and heating and stirring is continued until the mixture is homogeneous. Cool to room temperature and add skin active agent (s) and deposit agent (s). The pH is adjusted to 7.0 with sulfuric acid. Prior to packaging, the mixture is applied to the substrate by spraying, roller, dipping or otherwise and dried (if it contains water).

4444

185

Examples 79 to 82

Exemplary conditioning ingredients are prepared comprising the following ingredients:

<td>Components [wt. %]</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td>

<td></td><td> 79</td><td> 80</td><td> 81</td><td> 81</td>

<td>Niacinamide</td><td> 2,0</td><td> 4,0</td><td> 6,0</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>Retinylpropionate</td><td> -</td><td> 0,2</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>Panthenol</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 2,0</td><td> 0, 5</td><td> 0,5</td>

<td>Polyacylamide and isoparaffin laureth-7</td><td>and 2.0</td><td> 2,25</td><td> 2,25</td><td> 2, 0</td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 5,0</td><td> 3,0</td><td> 7,0</td><td> 12,0</td>

<td>Alantoin</td><td> 0,2</td><td> 0,05</td><td> 0,1</td><td> -</td>

<td>Aloe vera gel</td><td> 0,05</td><td> 0,075</td><td> 0,05</td><td> -</td>

<td>Tocopheryl acetate</td><td> 0,75</td><td> 0,5</td><td> 0,5</td><td> 0,5</td>

<td>Cetyl alcohol</td><td> 2,0</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,25</td><td> 0,3</td>

<td>Stearyl alcohol</td><td> 2,0</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,25</td><td> 0,5</td>

<td>Behenyl alcohol</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,25</td><td> 0,4</td>

<td>Dimethicone and dimethiconol</td><td> 0,75</td><td> 0, 5</td><td> 0, 50</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>Steareth-21</td><td> 0,6</td><td> 0,4</td><td> 0,5</td><td> -</td>

<td>Steareth-2</td><td> 0,1</td><td> 0,08</td><td> 0,03</td><td> —</td>

· Fc · fcfc · fcfc · fcfc · fcfc · fcfcfcfc

<td colspan="5"> 186</td>

<td>Cetearylglucoside</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 0,5</td>

<td>PPG-15 stearyl ether</td><td> 3, 0</td><td> 2,0</td><td> 1,00</td><td> 1,00</td>

<td>Isohexadekan</td><td> -</td><td> 7,0</td><td> 5,0</td><td> 5,4</td>

<td>Isononylisononanoate</td><td> 5,0</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>SEFA kotonát</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 1,2</td>

<td>Dimethicone (350 mm².with^_1)</td><td> 0,5</td><td> 0,0</td><td> 0,60</td><td> -0, 60</td>

<td>Disodium EDTA</td><td> 0,10</td><td> 0,10</td><td> 0,10</td><td> 0,10</td>

<td>Nylon 12¹</td><td> 1,5</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,1</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>Titanium dioxide (a) Mica²</td><td> 0,75</td><td> 1,5</td><td> 1,25</td><td> 0,25</td>

<td>Polydecen³</td><td> 0</td><td> 0</td><td> 0</td><td> 0</td>

<td>Petrolatum</td><td> 1,00</td><td> 4,00</td><td> 2,00</td><td> 2,00</td>

<td>Deionized water, fragrance,</td><td>Up to 100%</td><td>Up to 100%</td><td>Up to 100%</td><td>To</td>

<td>protective equipment</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 100 %</td>

<td>Examples 83 to 86</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>An example is prepared</td><td>conditioning</td><td>folders,</td><td>which</td><td>contain</td>

<td>the following components:</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Components [wt. %]</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td>

<td></td><td> 83</td><td> 84</td><td> 85</td><td> 86</td>

<td>Niacinamide</td><td> 2, 0</td><td> 3,0</td><td> 5,0</td><td> 3,5</td>

<td>Retinylpropionate</td><td> 0,28</td><td> 0,10</td><td> 0,28</td><td> 0,28</td>

i ·· · ·

187

<td>Panthenol</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,5</td><td> 0,5</td><td> 0, 5</td>

<td>Polyacylamide and isoparaffin laureth-7</td><td>and 2.0</td><td> 2,25</td><td> 2,25</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 6,0</td><td> 4,0</td><td> 7,0</td><td> 10,0</td>

<td>Alantoin</td><td> 0,10</td><td> 0,10</td><td> 0,10</td><td> -</td>

<td>Aloe vera</td><td> 0</td><td> 0, 03</td><td> 0,07</td><td> -</td>

<td>Tocopheryl acetate</td><td> 0,50</td><td> 1,25</td><td> 0,50</td><td> 0, 50</td>

<td>Cetyl alcohol</td><td> 0,75</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,25</td><td> 0,5</td>

<td>Stearyl alcohol</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,5</td><td> 1,20</td><td> 0,3</td>

<td>Behenyl alcohol</td><td> 1,00</td><td> 1, 50</td><td> 1,25</td><td> 0,4</td>

<td>Steareth-2</td><td> 0, 05</td><td> 0,05</td><td> 0, 05</td><td> -</td>

<td>Steareth-21</td><td> 0,40</td><td> 0, 45</td><td> 0, 50</td><td> -</td>

<td>Cetearylglucoside</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 0, 5</td>

<td>PPG-15 stearyl ether</td><td> 3,0</td><td> 2,0</td><td> 1,00</td><td> 1,00</td>

<td>Isohexadekan</td><td> 5,0</td><td> 7,0</td><td> -</td><td> 5,4</td>

<td>Isopropylisostearate</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 5, 0</td><td> 2,4</td>

<td>Isononylisononanoate</td><td> 1,0</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>SEFA kotonát</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 1,2</td>

<td>Disodium EDTA</td><td> 0,10</td><td> 0,10</td><td> 0,10</td><td> 0,10</td>

<td>Nylon 12¹</td><td> 1,5</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,1</td><td> 2,0</td>

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0022.tif" />

«« ·· ·· * « ·· ·«··

<td colspan="4"> 188</td>

<td>Titanium dioxide (a) Mica² 0,75</td><td> 1,5</td><td> 1,25</td><td> -</td>

<td>Polydecen³ 1,00</td><td> 2,00</td><td> 1,10</td><td> -</td>

<td>Petrolatum</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>Deionized Water, Fragrance, Up to 100% protective equipment</td><td>Until 100</td><td>% Up to 100%</td><td>DolOO%</td>

<td>Examples 87 to 88</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>An exemplary conditioning is prepared contain the following components:</td><td>folders</td><td colspan="2">on the skin that</td>

<td>Components [wt. %]</td><td></td><td>Example 87</td><td>Example 88</td>

<td>Niacinamide</td><td></td><td> 2,0</td><td> 3,5</td>

<td>Panthenol</td><td></td><td> 1,0</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>Polyacrylamide and isoparaffin and laureth-7</td><td></td><td> 2,25</td><td> 2, 75</td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td></td><td> 10, 0</td><td> 9,0</td>

<td>Tocopheryl acetate</td><td></td><td> 0,50</td><td> 0,75</td>

<td>Cetylalakohol</td><td></td><td> 0,8</td><td> 1,5</td>

<td>Stearyl alcohol</td><td></td><td> 0,6</td><td> 1,0</td>

<td>PEG-100 stearate</td><td></td><td> 0,1</td><td> 0,1</td>

<td>Stearic acid</td><td></td><td> 0,1</td><td> 0,1</td>

<td>Sucrose cocoate and sorbitan stearate⁴</td><td></td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,0</td>

• · · · • · · · · · · · · * ·

<td></td><td colspan="3"> « « · · ·· · ·</td>

<td>Dimethicone and dimethiconol</td><td> 189</td><td> 2, 0</td><td> 4,0</td>

<td>Isohexadekan</td><td></td><td> 3,0</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>Isopropylisostearate</td><td></td><td> 1,5</td><td> 1,0</td>

<td>SEFA kotonát</td><td></td><td> 0,5</td><td> 1,0</td>

<td>Disodium EDTA</td><td></td><td> 0,10</td><td> 0,10</td>

<td>Polymethylsilsesquioxan⁵</td><td></td><td> 0,5</td><td> 1,0</td>

<td>Titanium dioxide</td><td></td><td> 0,2</td><td> 0,6</td>

<td>Polydece³</td><td></td><td> 1,0</td><td> -0</td>

<td>Petrolatum</td><td></td><td> -</td><td> 3,0</td>

<td>Deionized water, fragrance, protective</td><td>means</td><td>up to 100%</td><td>dolOO</td>

1) Orgasol ® 2002 D NAT COS

2) Green interference pigment

3) Silkflo 364 NF from BP Amoco

4) Arlatone 2121 from ICI

5) Tospearl 145a from GE Silicones

Example 89

An exemplary skin conditioning composition is prepared which is particularly suitable for use in infants, toddlers and children by mixing the following ingredients:

φ φ φ φ φ φ · · ·

190

<td>Folders</td><td>[wt</td>

<td>Water</td><td> 74,810</td>

<td>Disodium EDTA</td><td> 0,100</td>

<td>SEPIGEL 305</td><td> 1,200</td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td> 7,000</td>

<td>Montanov 68</td><td> 0,500</td>

<td>Isohexadekan</td><td> 5,400</td>

<td>Ethylparaben</td><td> 0,150</td>

<td>Propylparaben</td><td> 0,070</td>

<td>Stearic acid</td><td> 0,100</td>

<td>PEG-100 stearate</td><td> 0,100</td>

<td>Stearyl alcohol</td><td> 0,480</td>

<td>Cetyl alcohol 95%</td><td> 0,320</td>

<td>Behenyl alcohol</td><td> 0, 400</td>

<td>Isopropylisostearate</td><td> 2,400</td>

<td>SEFA kotonát</td><td> 1,200</td>

<td>Nylon 12</td><td> 1,000</td>

<td>Tospearl 145A</td><td> 0,250</td>

<td>Sodium hydroxide - 40% solution</td><td> 0,020</td>

<td>Benzyl alcohol</td><td> 0,250</td>

191

Petrolatum

2, 000

DC1403 2,000

Aroma 0,250

III. Cleaning components

Examples 90 and 91

Exemplary cleaning ingredients suitable for use as a daytime shower cleaner are prepared by combining the following ingredients:

Components [wt. %]

Sodium C12 to C14 alkyl sulfate

Alkylpolyglucoside

Polymers (4-vinylpyridine N-oxide) polymer

Sodium carbonate

Water

Perfume

Example

0,20

0, 075

0,015

Residue

Example

0,25

0.075 residue

Examples 92 to 105

Exemplary floor cleaners are prepared by mixing the following components:

• · « · 4 * · • · 4 ·* *· 4· 4« * ♦ · 4 * 4 4 • 44 4 4 · ·» · 4 4» «4 4« «4 · ·

192

<td>Example Cg-16</td><td>ClO-16</td><td>C8-12</td><td>Cn</td><td>PVNO</td><td>Propoxy-</td>

<td>APG</td><td>APG</td><td>APG</td><td>EO5</td><td>Reilly</td><td>propanol</td>

<td>Plantaren</td><td>Plantaren</td><td>AKZO</td><td>Neodol</td><td></td><td></td>

<td> 2000</td><td> 1200</td><td>AG6210</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

[wt. %]

<td> 92</td><td> 0, 06</td><td> —</td><td> —</td><td> —</td><td> —</td><td> -</td>

<td> 93</td><td> 0,06</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 0,015</td><td> -</td>

<td> 94</td><td> 0, 06</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 0, 015</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td> 95</td><td> -</td><td> 0,06</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td> 96</td><td> -</td><td> 0, 06</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 0, 015</td><td> -</td>

<td> 97</td><td> -</td><td> 0,06</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 0,015</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td> 98</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 0,06</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td> 99</td><td></td><td></td><td> 0, 06</td><td></td><td> 0, 015</td><td> -</td>

<td> 100</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 0,06</td><td> -</td><td> 0,015</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td> 101</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 0, 06</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td> 102</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 0, 06</td><td> 0,015</td><td> -</td>

<td> 103</td><td> —</td><td></td><td></td><td> 0,06</td><td> 0,015</td><td> 2,0</td>

104

0,015

9 * 99 ř · · 1

193

105 - - _ _ 0,015 2,0

Note: All of the formulations in Examples 92-105 contain 0.015% soap stain suppressant from Dow Corning and 0.04% perfume and deionized water to supplement.

Mixtures:

All raw materials are purchased from commercial sources. The PVNO used in the examples above is manufactured by Reilly Industries and has a molecular weight of about 20,000 g / mol. The surfactants used are Plantaren 2000 from Henkel, a commercially available cosmetic C₈ to C₁₆ alkylpolyglucoside, Plantaren 1200 from Henkel is a commercially available cosmetic C10 to C18₆ alkylpolyglucoside. AG-6210 from Akzo is commercially available C₈ to C_x2 alkylpolyglucoside, Neodol C11 EO5 is a commercially available nonionic alkyl ethoxylate containing an alkyl group having an average chain length of about 11 carbon atoms and an average of about five ethoxy groups per molecule. The solvent used is propylene glycol propyl ether from Sigma Aldrich.

Examples 106 to 111

Exemplary antibacterial ingredients for hard surface cleaning are prepared by mixing the following ingredients:

Component Example Example Example Example Example Example [wt. %] 106 107 108 109 110 111

<td colspan="3"></td><td> 194</td><td>it it • it it</td><td>* to · • this * · «· To ·</td><td>It * ♦ ♦ it «« · This · • · · · · «to ··</td>

<td>Organic</td><td> 1,5</td><td> 1,5</td><td> 2,75</td><td> 1,25</td><td> 1,5</td><td> 0, 75</td>

<td>Acid No. 1</td><td> 1</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Surface</td><td> 1,75</td><td> 1,75</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>active substance</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>No. I²</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Solvent</td><td> 0, 5</td><td> 0, 5</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 0, 5</td><td> 0, 5</td>

<td>No. I³</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Hydrotrop⁴</td><td> 1,2</td><td> 1,2</td><td> -</td><td> 0,45</td><td> 1,20</td><td> 1,2</td>

<td>Substance suppressive foaming⁵</td><td></td><td> 0,0037</td><td></td><td> 0,0030</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Perfume</td><td> 0,2</td><td> 0,2</td><td> -</td><td> 0,20</td><td> 0,20</td><td> 0,2</td>

<td>Water</td><td>residue</td><td>residue</td><td>Residue</td><td>residue</td><td>residue</td><td>residue</td>

<td>1) Acid i</td><td>lemon,</td><td>commercially</td><td>available</td><td colspan="3">from Cargill.</td>

<td>2) Non-ionic</td><td>surface</td><td>active</td><td>substance on</td><td colspan="3">alcohol ethoxylate base,</td>

<td>commercially</td><td>available</td><td colspan="2">from Vista</td><td colspan="3">Chemical Company pod</td>

Tradename ALFONIC® 810-6 Ethoxylated.

3) Butoxypropoxypropanol commercially available from Dow Chemical.

4) Sodium cumene sulfonate, commercially available from ReutgersNease Chemical Company under the trade name NAXONATE®45SC.

5) Silicone suds suppressor commercially available from

195 Dow Corning under the trade name DOW AF.

Examples 112 to 115

Exemplary antibacterial ingredients for hard cleaning are prepared

<td>surfaces by mixing</td><td colspan="2">next</td><td colspan="4">Ingredients:</td>

<td>Component</td><td></td><td></td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td><td>Example</td>

<td>[wt. %]</td><td></td><td></td><td> 112</td><td> 113</td><td> 114</td><td> 115</td>

<td>Organic acid</td><td>No I⁶</td><td></td><td> 1,5</td><td> 1,5</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>Organic acid</td><td>No 2⁷</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 4,0</td><td> -</td>

<td>Organic acid</td><td>No 3⁸</td><td></td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 3,0</td>

<td colspan="2">Surfactant no.</td><td>l⁹</td><td> -</td><td> -</td><td> 1,0</td><td> 1,5</td>

<td colspan="2">Surfactant no.</td><td> 2¹⁰</td><td> 0,4</td><td> 1,0</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>Solvent # 2¹¹</td><td></td><td></td><td> 9,4</td><td> 9,4</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>Solvent No. 3¹²</td><td></td><td></td><td> 0,55</td><td> 0,55</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>Solvent No. 4¹³</td><td></td><td></td><td> 0,55</td><td> 0,55</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>Perfume</td><td></td><td></td><td> 0,075</td><td> 0,75</td><td> -</td><td> -</td>

<td>Water</td><td></td><td></td><td>Residue</td><td>residue</td><td>residue</td><td>Residue</td>

<td colspan="3">6) Citric acid, commercially</td><td>available</td><td colspan="3">from Cargill.</td>

7) Acetic acid, commercially available from Aldrich.

8) Lactic acid commercially available from Aldrich.

9) Nonionic surfactant based on alcohol ethoxylate,

196 commercially available from Vista Chemical Company under the trade name ALFONIC® 810-6 Ethoxylated.

(10) Amine oxide surfactant (C_X2) available from Stepan Company under the tradename NINOX® X9336.

<td>11) Ethanol commercially available from</td><td>Aldrich</td><td></td>

<td>12) Propylene glycol t-butyl ether</td><td>commercially available from</td><td>business</td>

<td>Aldrich</td><td></td><td></td>

<td>13) Di (ethylene glycol) butyl ether</td><td>commercially available from</td><td>business</td>

<td>Aldrich</td><td></td><td></td>

Examples of AE

Prepare a cleaning component suitable for cleaning and reviving the fabric through a protective wrapping bag. The following ingredients are mixed.

Example A

<td>Component</td><td>Weight</td>

<td>Emulsifier (TWEEN 20) *</td><td> 0, 5</td>

<td>Perfume</td><td> 0, 5</td>

<td>KATHON®</td><td> 0,0003</td>

<td>Sodium benzoate</td><td> 0,1</td>

<td>Water</td><td>residue</td>

Polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monolaurate available from ICI

Surfactants l

• · 4·

4 «4 • 4 0 4

4 44 ··

00 4 0 44

197

<td colspan="3">Other preferred cleansing components for use in</td><td>jsoi dryer</td><td>and:</td>

<td>Component</td><td></td><td>Weight %</td><td colspan="2">Range (% by weight)</td>

<td>Water</td><td></td><td> 99,0</td><td>95.1 to</td><td> 99,9</td>

<td>Perfume</td><td></td><td> 0,5</td><td>0.05 to</td><td> 1, 5</td>

<td>Surfactant</td><td></td><td> 0,5</td><td>0.05 to</td><td> 2, 0</td>

<td colspan="2">Ethanol or isopropanol</td><td> 0</td><td>Eventual</td><td>up to 4%</td>

<td>Solvent</td><td></td><td> 0</td><td>Eventual</td><td>up to 4%</td>

<td>Another advantageous cleaning</td><td>folders</td><td>for use</td><td colspan="2">in the dryer are:</td>

<td></td><td colspan="2">Example B Example</td><td>C Example D</td><td>Example</td>

<td>Water</td><td> 97,63</td><td> 98,85</td><td> 77,22</td><td> 96,71</td>

<td>Perfume</td><td> 0</td><td> 0,38</td><td> 0,38</td><td> 0</td>

<td>Surface active substance</td><td> 0,285</td><td> 0</td><td> 0</td><td> 0,285</td>

<td>Solvent (e.g. BPP</td><td> 2,0</td><td> 0</td><td> 0</td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>KATHON®</td><td> 0,0003</td><td> 0</td><td> 0</td><td> 0</td>

<td>Emulsifier (TWEEN 20) *</td><td> 0</td><td> 0,5</td><td> 0,38</td><td> 0</td>

<td>Amine oxide</td><td> 0,0350</td><td> 0</td><td> 0</td><td> 0,0350</td>

<td>MgCl₂</td><td> 0, 045</td><td> 0</td><td> 0</td><td> 0</td>

<td>MgSO₄</td><td> 0</td><td> 0</td><td> 0, 058</td><td> 0</td>

198 • · *·

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0023.tif" />

Hydrogen peroxide 0

Citric acid

Proxel GXL

Bardac 2249 0

1,2-propanediol 0

<td> 0</td><td> 0</td><td> 0, 6</td>

<td> 0</td><td> 0</td><td> 0,5</td>

<td> 0,8</td><td> 0, 8</td><td> 0</td>

<td> 0,2</td><td> 0,2</td><td> 0</td>

<td> 0</td><td> 21,75</td><td> 0</td>

Polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monolaurate Surfactants available from ICI

IV. Cosmetic ingredients:

Example 116

A cosmetic component is prepared to provide protection of the skin against ultraviolet radiation.

Component

Hydrophilic phase:

Water

D-panthenol

Disodium EDTA

Weight %

69, 9

0, 8

0,1

Polyacrylamide and Ci₃_and₄isoparaffin in laureth-7

1,0

199

Hydrophobic phase:

<td>Octylmethoxycinnamate</td><td></td><td> 7,5</td>

<td>Isohexadekan</td><td></td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>Dimethicone copolyol</td><td></td><td> 0,7</td>

<td>Steareth-21</td><td></td><td> 1,25</td>

<td>Steareth-2</td><td></td><td> 0,14</td>

<td>Stearyl alcohol</td><td></td><td> 0,3</td>

<td>Cetylphosphate</td><td></td><td> 0,14</td>

<td>Behenyl alcohol</td><td></td><td> 0,4</td>

<td>PVP eikosan</td><td></td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>Tocopherol acetate</td><td></td><td> 0,5</td>

<td>Spectroveil MOTG (oxide</td><td>zinc)</td><td> 8,4</td>

<td></td><td>Protection phase:</td><td></td>

<td>Glycerine</td><td></td><td> 3,0</td>

<td>Protective equipment</td><td></td><td> 2,0</td>

<td>Dimethicone copolyol</td><td></td><td> 3,0</td>

<td>Water</td><td></td><td> 1,0</td>

Pentadekalakton

0,4

ΦΦ φ φ · · · · • • • • • • • • • • • •

200

V. Laminate strips

The following examples are shown in Table 1 as exemplary laminate strips suitable for the articles of the present invention. Since the choice of outer and inner layers and combinations is substantially infinite, the examples are intended to be illustrative of possible laminate web structures and are not intended to be limiting to any particular material or structure.

Table 1 shows the different combinations of materials. The layers are numbered in order of how close they are from one outer layer of the laminate strip to its other outer layer.

Clopay-type molded films were obtained from Clopay, Cincinnati, OH, USA. By formed foil is meant a macroscopically expanded three-dimensional plastic web having a continuum of capillary nets extending from one surface of the web and terminating in the form of slotted holes in the opposite surface of the web. Such a shaped film is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,342,314.

Foils formed from elastomers are available from Tredgar Film Products, Terre Haute, IN, USA. Such films are an improvement to the above-mentioned web from Radel et al., As described in the above-mentioned U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08 / 816,106. This application describes elastic polymer belts generally according to the above-mentioned U.S. Pat. made of elastomeric materials known in the art and may be laminates of polymeric materials. Laminates of this type can be prepared by coextruding elastomeric materials and less elastic surface layers and can be used in body-wrapping portions of absorbent garments such as waistbands. 444 4 4 4 4 4

201 part and leg cuffs.

The open-cell foam materials of the large internal phase emulsion can generally be produced as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,260,345 and 5,268,224.

Non-woven BBA and Corvin / BBA materials were obtained from BBA, Greenville, SC, USA .

BOUNTY® paper towels were obtained from The Procter &amp; Gamble Co., Cincinnati, OH, USA.

3M products were purchased from 3M, Minneapolis, MN, USA.

For the materials listed below, the basis weight is expressed in g / m². Low density polyethylene is labeled LDPE, polypropylene is labeled PP and polyethylene is labeled PE. Non-woven fiber materials bonded together by the spunbonded process are referred to as SB.

Table 1:

Examples of laminate strips suitable for use in the articles of the present invention

<td>Pnkl. C.</td><td>Layer 1</td><td>Layer 2</td>

<td> 117</td><td> 80/20</td><td>23 g / m² PE</td>

<td></td><td>(PE / PP)</td><td>formed</td>

<td></td><td>30 g / m² SB</td><td>folie od</td>

<td></td><td>nonwoven from</td><td>business</td>

<td></td><td>BBA</td><td>Clopay</td>

Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5

50/50 (PE / PP) g / m² SB nonwoven from BBA

202

118

119

120

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0024.tif" />

<td> 80/20</td><td>42 g / m²</td><td>23 g / m²</td><td>PE 50/50</td>

<td>(PE / PP)</td><td>BOUNTY®</td><td>formed</td><td>(PE / PP)</td>

<td>30 g / m² SB</td><td>paper</td><td>folie od</td><td>30 g / m²</td>

<td>nonwoven from</td><td>cloth</td><td>business</td><td>SB</td>

<td>BBA</td><td></td><td>Clopay</td><td>nonwoven from company BBA</td>

<td> 80/20</td><td>42 g / m²</td><td>25 g / m²</td><td>PE 80/20</td>

<td>(PE / PP)</td><td>BOUNTY®</td><td>formed</td><td>(PE / PP)</td>

<td>30 g / m² SB</td><td>paper</td><td>folie od</td><td>30 g / m²</td>

<td>nonwoven from</td><td>cloth</td><td>business</td><td>SB</td>

<td>BBA</td><td></td><td>Tredegar</td><td>nonwoven from company BBA</td>

<td>30 g / m²</td><td>88 g / m²</td><td>42 g / m²</td><td>30 g / m²</td>

<td>LDPE SB</td><td>elastomer-</td><td>BOUNTY®</td><td>LDPE SB</td>

<td>nonwoven from</td><td>her</td><td>paper</td><td>nonwoven</td>

<td>business</td><td>shaped</td><td>cloth</td><td>from company</td>

<td>Corovin /</td><td>folie od</td><td></td><td>Corovin /</td>

<td>BBA</td><td>business Tredegar</td><td></td><td>BBA</td>

<td> 80/20</td><td>25 g / m² PE</td><td>25 g / m²</td><td> 80/20</td>

<td>(PE / PP)</td><td>formed</td><td>formed</td><td>(PE / PP)</td>

<td>30 g / m² SB</td><td>folie od</td><td>folie od</td><td>30 g / m²</td>

<td>nonwoven from</td><td>business</td><td>business</td><td>SB ne-</td>

<td>BBA</td><td>Tredegar</td><td>Tredegar</td><td>woven from BBA</td>

121 ·

99 9

122

123

124

203

<td> 50/50</td><td>25 g / m²</td><td>PE 25 g / m²</td><td> 50/50</td>

<td>(PE / PP)</td><td>formed</td><td>formed</td><td>(PE / PP)</td>

<td>30 g / m² SB</td><td>folie od</td><td>folie od</td><td>30 g / m²</td>

<td>nonwoven from</td><td>business</td><td>business</td><td>SB</td>

<td>BBA</td><td>Tredegar</td><td>Tredegar</td><td>nonwoven from company BBA</td>

<td> 50/50</td><td>25 g / m²</td><td>PE 25 g / m² PE</td><td> 50/50</td>

<td>(PE / PP)</td><td>flat</td><td>flat</td><td>(PE / PP)</td>

<td>30 g / m² SB</td><td>folie od</td><td>folie od</td><td>30 g / m²</td>

<td>nonwoven from</td><td>business</td><td>business</td><td>SB</td>

<td>BBA</td><td>Clopay</td><td>Clopay</td><td>nonwoven from company BBA</td>

<td>50/50 (PE / PP) 30 g / m² SB nonwoven from BBA</td><td>4 miles (0, mm) PE flat folie od business Clopay</td><td>1 50/50 (PE / PP) 30 g / m² SB nonwoven from BBA</td><td></td>

V. Articles of the Invention

Example 125

An exemplary skin cleansing and conditioning product is prepared as follows:

9 »9 • «4 * 4 ·♦· «9 9

9 9 9

9« 4 9 »9 99 • 9 9 9

9 «♦

4 4 9

44 • 4 44

9 4 4

9 4 · 9

4* 4444

204

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the laminate web of Example 117 by extruding continuously through the coating head in a single line along the center of the web. The cleaning component is extruded at a rate to give 0.5 g per finished product. The skin conditioning component of Example 23 is applied as a coating by means of a slot in two 30 mm wide strips on both sides of the cleansing component at a distance of 20 mm from the cleansing component. The skin conditioning component is kept in a hot container and pumped through the slit head to one side of the laminate strip at a rate equal to 1.25 g of the skin conditioning component per finished product. The belt passes through a cooling fan so that the conditioning component rapidly cools on the outer surface of the article. The strip is cut into individual products in the form of rectangles measuring about 140 mm x 10 5 mm with rounded corners.

Example 126

An exemplary skin cleansing product is prepared as follows:

The laminate strip of Example 120 was cut into pieces 200 x 200 mm. The cleaning component of Example 19 is applied to the web with a brush until 0.25 g of the cleaning component is applied. The product is dried and stored until use. The product has two sides, one soft and one coarser for more thorough cleaning.

Examples 127-131

An exemplary skin cleansing and conditioning product is prepared using the skin conditioning agents of the Examples

4* 4· 44 44 4 4 »4 ··· · 4 4 · 4 4 4 4 · 44« 4 4 44 4 4 4 • 44 444 ·4 «44 4 4

4 k 4 fc 4 4 444

44 44 44 4« 4444

205 to 40.

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the laminate web of Example 123 by extruding continuously through the head-forming coating in a single line along the center of the web. The cleaning component is extruded at a rate to give 0.5 g per finished product. The second substrate sheet, an air-laid low density web, is continuously fed above the first substrate by placing it in contact with the layer containing the cleaning component. The web comprises a blend of 10% PET fibers with a fiber weight of 15 denier, 50% bicomponent fibers with a fiber weight of 3 deniers with a PET core and PE sheath, and 40% bicomponent fibers with a fiber weight of 10 denier of the same core and sheath composition. / m². The strips are continuously fed into an ultrasonic gluer, which glues in a spot-like manner with a grid-shaped pattern, where the connecting points have a diameter of 4 mm and are evenly distributed along the strip. The skin conditioning component is applied in the layer by means of a slit from the hot container from where it is pumped through the slit head to both sides of the substrate belt at a rate of 0.25 g of skin conditioning component per finished product (i.e. about 13 g / m 2 is added).²) and the belt passes through a cooling fan so that the conditioning component on the outer surfaces of the product is rapidly cooled. The slot coating container is continuously stirred to maintain emulsion stability. The strip is cut into individual rectangular products that measure 120 mm x 160 mm and have rounded corners.

Examples 132-136

An exemplary skin cleansing and conditioning product is

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0025.tif" />

* · · · · «· • · ·· ····

206 prepared using the skin conditioning agents of Examples 27 to 31.

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the laminate web of Example 117 by continuously extruding through the head-forming coating in a single line along the center of the belt. The cleaning component is extruded at a rate of 0.5 g per finished product. The second substrate sheet is continuously applied to the first substrate by contacting the surfactant-containing layer. The second substrate is a hydroentangled material with a basis weight of 50 g / m 2² a 50:50 mixture of Rayon and Polyester, available from DuPont. The strips are continuously fed to an ultrasonic gluer, which glues in a spot manner with a grid-shaped pattern, where the bonding points have a diameter of 4 mm and are evenly spaced along the strip. The skin conditioning component is applied in the layer by means of a slit from the hot container from where it is pumped through the slit head to both sides of the substrate belt at a rate of 0.25 g skin conditioning component per finished product (i.e. about 13 g / m 2 is added).²) and the belt passes through a cooling fan so that the conditioning component on the outer surfaces of the product is rapidly cooled. The slot coating container is continuously stirred to maintain emulsion stability. The strip is cut into individual rectangular products measuring 200 mm x 130 mm and having rounded corners.

Example 137

An exemplary skin cleansing product is prepared as follows using the liquid cleansing component of Example 8.

207

The liquid cleaning component is applied to the first substrate by soaking a portion of the 150 mm x 115 mm substrate in the bath of the mixture until it increases its weight by 8 grams. The substrate is an air bonded web comprising polyester fibers and has a basis weight of 100 g / m 2². The substrate is dried. A piece of the second substrate, the laminate strip of Example 119, is placed on the first substrate. A second piece of laminate strip of Example 119 is placed under the first substrate. The substrates are joined together using an ultrasonic gluer, which glues in a spot manner with a grid-shaped pattern, where the bonding points have a diameter of 4 mm and are evenly distributed along the strip. The substrate is cut into 140 mm x 105 mm rectangles with rounded corners.

Examples 138-141

An exemplary cleaning sample is prepared as follows using the laminate strips of Examples 118, 119, 121 and 122.

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the first substrate by continuously pushing the cleaning component through the applicator head in four lines spaced 20 mm apart. The cleaning component is extruded at a rate of 4.4 g of cleaning component onto the finished product. The substrate is an air laid, lightweight, low density web comprising a blend of 30% PET fibers with a fiber weight of 15 denier, 35% bicomponent fibers with a PET core and a PE sheath with 3 denier fiber weight, and 35% bicomponent fibers of the same sheath and core composition. with a fiber weight of 10 denier and a basis weight of 85 g / m². A second substrate sheet, which is a laminate strip, is continuously fed to the first substrate, and is contacted with a surfactant-containing layer. Belts are continuously supplied to •

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0026.tif" />

208 an ultrasonic gluer which glues in a spot manner with a grid-shaped pattern, where the joints have a diameter of 4 mm and are evenly distributed along the strip. The substrate is cut into 120 mm x 160 mm rectangles with rounded corners.

Examples 142 to 146

An exemplary cleansing and conditioning product is prepared as described below using the skin conditioning ingredients of Examples 22-26.

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the first substrate by continuously pushing this component through the applicator head in four lines spaced 20 mm apart, measured transversely. The cleaning component is extruded at a rate of 4.4 g of cleaning component onto the finished product. The substrate is an air laid, lightweight, low density web comprising a blend of 30% PET fibers with a fiber weight of 15 denier, 35% bicomponent fibers with a PET core and a PE sheath with 3 denier fiber weight, and 35% bicomponent fibers of the same sheath and core composition. with a fiber weight of 10 denier and a basis weight of 85 g / m². The second substrate is continuously fed to the first substrate and is contacted with a surfactant-containing layer. This second substrate is the same as the first. The third substrate belt, which is a laminate belt of Example 119, is continuously applied to the second substrate belt, positioned so as to be in contact with the second substrate. The strips are continuously fed to an ultrasonic gluer, which glues in a spot manner with a grid-shaped pattern, where the bonding points have a diameter of 4 mm and are evenly spaced along the strip. The skin conditioning component is applied at points from the hot container.

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0027.tif" />

209 from which 2 g of skin conditioning agent per finished product is pumped through an extrusion die head to both sides of the belt. The component is distributed in points, each containing 0.1 g of conditioning component and having a diameter of about 4 mm, and is located at some bonding point. The article passes the cooling fan so that the conditioning component rapidly cools on the exterior surface of the article. The strip is cut into individual products, which are rectangles of 140 mm x 105 mm with rounded corners.

Examples 147 to 151

An exemplary cleansing and conditioning product is prepared as described below using the skin conditioning ingredients of Examples 41 to 45.

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the first substrate by pressing through the applicator continuously in four lines spaced apart at 20 mm pitch. The cleaning component is extruded at a rate that yields 4.0 grams of cleaning component per finished product. The substrate is an air laid, lightweight, low density web of a blend of 30% PET fibers with a fiber weight of 15 denier, 35% bicomponent fibers with a PET core and a PE sheath of 3 denier fiber and 35% bicomponent fibers of the same sheath and core composition 10 denier fiber and has a basis weight of 85 g / m². The second substrate is continuously fed to the first substrate and is contacted with a surfactant-containing layer. This second substrate is the same as the first. The third substrate sheet, which is the laminate strip of Example 117, continuously applies to the second substrate sheet, positioned so as to be in contact with the second substrate. The strips are continuously fed into an ultrasonic gluer that sticks together

210 in a dot-like pattern with a lattice-like pattern where the connecting points have a diameter of 4 mm and are evenly distributed along the strip. The skin conditioning component is applied at points from a hot container from which it is pumped through an extrusion die head onto a laminate web at a rate of 2 g of skin conditioning agent per finished product. The conditioning ingredient is distributed at the points, each containing 0.1 g of the conditioning ingredient and having a diameter of about 4 mm, and is located at a bonding point. The article passes the cooling fan so that the conditioning component rapidly cools on the exterior surface of the article. The strip is cut into individual products, which are rectangles of 140 mm x 105 mm with rounded corners.

Examples 152 to 154

An exemplary cleansing and conditioning product is prepared as described below using the skin conditioning ingredients of Examples 57 to 59.

The cleaning component of Example 12 is applied to one side of the first substrate by continuously pushing this component through the applicator head in four lines spaced 20 mm apart, measured transversely. The cleaning component is extruded at a rate of 4.0 g cleaning component onto the finished product. The substrate is an air laid, lightweight, low density web comprising a blend of 30% PET fibers with a fiber weight of 15 denier, 35% bicomponent fibers with a PET core and a PE sheath with 3 denier fiber weight, and 35% bicomponent fibers of the same sheath and core composition. with a fiber weight of 10 denier and a basis weight of 85 g / m². The second substrate is continuously fed to the first substrate, whereby the

211 contacting the layer containing the cleaning component. This second substrate is the same as the first. The third substrate web, which is a laminate web of Example 118, is continuously applied to the second substrate web, positioned so that it is in contact with the second substrate. The strips are continuously fed to an ultrasonic gluer, which glues in a spot manner with a grid-shaped pattern, where the bonding points have a diameter of 4 mm and are evenly spaced along the strip. The skin conditioning component is applied at points from a hot container from which 2 g of skin conditioning agent is pumped through the extrusion die to both sides of the belt (addition of about 68 g / m 2)²) and the article passes around the cooling fan so that the conditioning component rapidly cools on the exterior surface of the article. The strip is cut into individual products, which are rectangles of 140 mm x 105 mm with rounded corners.

Examples 155 to 156

An exemplary cleansing and conditioning product is prepared using the skin conditioning ingredients of Examples 29 through

30.

The cleaning component of Example 12 is applied to one side of the first substrate by continuously pushing the cleaning component through the applicator head in four lines spaced apart

<img file="CZ20021933A3_D0028.tif" />

212 mm, 40 mm and 20 mm, measured across the belt, producing a pair of parallel lines on each side of the belt. The cleaning component is extruded at a rate of 4.4 g of cleaning component onto the finished product.

The substrate is an air laid, lightweight, low density web comprising polyester fibers having a fiber weight of 10 derniers and having a basis weight of 100 g / m 2². The second substrate is continuously fed to the first substrate and is contacted with a surfactant-containing layer. This second substrate is a laminate strip according to Example 123. The strips are continuously fed to an ultrasonic gluer which glues in a spot manner with a lattice pattern where the bonding points have a diameter of 4 mm and are evenly spaced along the strip. The products are cut into 120 mm x 160 mm rectangles with rounded corners. 2 g the skin conditioning ingredients are applied to the product on the laminate web.

The component is applied to the article as a hot liquid (60-70 ° C) using a pipette so that the coating is in the form of dots about 4 mm in diameter. Each point contains 0.1 g of the mixture and these points are located in a glued area.

Examples 157-159

Exemplary cleaning and conditioning products with the cleaning ingredients of Examples 1, 2 and 5 are prepared as follows:

Eight grams of the cleaning component is applied to one side of the permeable,

9 9 9 • · • · active substances, polyethylene fibrous, low density material that is normally on this heat

213 a fusible strip consisting of low-melting, heat-sealable fibers in four quadrants forming a 10 x 12 inch (254 x 305 mm) rectangle, leaving space at the edge and between the quadrants to seal the layers in the absence of surface from suture material distributors, a weldable web is placed with a polyester fleece layer cut to the same size as the web having a basis weight of 136 g / m 2². The polyester fleece has a basis weight of 136 g / m² and consists of polyester fibers with an average diameter of 30 μπι (microns) and is bonded with an adhesive available from, for example, Mountain Places Extra Heavy Batting No. 205 of Stearns Textiles, Cincinnati, OH, USA. The laminate strip layer of Example 123 is placed under the weldable strip. The layers are glued together in a rectangular shape as window panes using a heat welding tool that uses a pressure plate heat welding tool such as the Sentinel type 808, available from Sencorp, Hynnais, MA, USA with sufficient temperature and pressure to cause this. For example, when the web is melted and flows into the first layer to form a proper bond, typically a temperature of 300 ° F (167 ° C) and 30 psi (0.31 MPa) for 6 to 10 seconds is sufficient. The joint is continuous around the edges and has one cross member as in the window pane in each X and Y direction, with a width of about 2 mm. After cooling, 3 g of the skin conditioning component of Example 22 is applied to one side of the finished product. The conditioning component is applied as a hot liquid (70-80 ° C) by means of an extrusion die head such that the coating is in the form of dots with a diameter of 7 mm. Each point contains 0.3 g of conditioning component. The product is trimmed and the corners rounded and stored until use.

• · ··

214

Examples 160 to 163

Exemplary skin cleansing and conditioning products are prepared with the melt cleaners of Examples 7, 13, 14 and 15 as follows.

The hot melt cleaning component is continuously added to the web by applying a uniform coating of the component to the web at a rate of 80 g / m 2 through the slit.². The web is an air-laid web of 40% polyester fiber of 15 denier, 30% bi-component fiber with 3 denier fiber with PET core and PE sheath, and 30% bi-component fiber with 10 denier fiber with the same core composition and and has a basis weight of 85 g / m². The second substrate is continuously applied to the first substrate and is brought into contact with the surfactant-containing layer. This second substrate is the laminate strip of Example 120. The strips are continuously fed into an ultrasonic adhesive that glue in a dot pattern including a grid with a 4 mm diameter bonded dots that are evenly spaced across the belt. The skin conditioning component of Example 26 is added to the belt by covering the conditioning component on both sides of the article at points of 3 g per finished product. Each point contains 0.1 g of component and has a diameter of 5 mm, the conditioning component points being placed together so that they are in the center of the finished product. The substrate strip is cut into individual rectangular products measuring 120 mm x 160 mm with rounded corners.

Example 164

An exemplary skin cleansing product is prepared as follows:

1119 1119 19 · • ·« ♦ » · ·· «&lt;« · « • 111 1 9 · 9 119 • 1 19 1 · »· ·· ·*··

215

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the first substrate by extruding through the extruder continuously in four lines spaced 20 mm apart, measured across the web. The cleaning component is extruded to the extent that it yields 4.0 g of cleaning component per finished product. The substrate is an air laid, lightweight, low density web of a blend of 30% PET fibers with a fiber weight of 15 denier, 35% bicomponent fibers with a 3 denier fiber weight with a PET core and PE sheath, and 35% bicomponent fibers with a fiber weight of 10 denier the core and sheath composition and has a basis weight of 85 g / m². The second substrate is continuously laid on the first substrate and comes into contact with the surfactant-containing layer. The second substrate is a blend of polyester and cellulose fibers with a basis weight of 120 g / m 2². The third substrate is applied to the second substrate. The third substrate is the laminate strip of Example 119. The strips are continuously fed into an ultrasonic adhesive that connects them in a dot pattern from a grid of 4 mm diameter bonded spots that are uniformly positioned across the strip. Products are cut into rectangles 140 mm x 105 mm with rounded corners.

Examples 165-170

An exemplary skin cleansing and conditioning product is prepared as follows:

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the first substrate by extruding through the extruder continuously in four lines spaced 20 mm apart, measured across the web. The cleaning component is extruded to the extent that it yields 4.0 g of cleaning component per finished product. The substrate is an air laid, lightweight, low density fleece of 30% PET • 0 • 4

I * ··· ·

216 fibers having a fiber weight of 15 denier, 35% bicomponent fibers with a fiber weight of 3 deniers with a PET core and a PE sheath, and 35% bicomponent fibers with a fiber weight of 10 denier with the same core and sheath composition and have a basis weight of 85 g / m². The second substrate is continuously laid on the first substrate and comes into contact with the cleaning agent-containing layer. This second substrate is a blend of polyester and cellulose fibers having a basis weight of 120 g / m 2². The third substrate is applied to the second substrate. The third substrate is an air laid, lightweight, low density web of a blend of 30% PET fibers with a fiber weight of 15 denier, 35% bicomponent fibers with a 3 denier fiber weight with a PET core and a PE sheath and 35% bicomponent fibers with a fiber weight of 10 denier. with the same core and shell composition and has a basis weight of 85 g / m².

The fourth substrate strip is placed on the third belt and is a laminate belt according to Example 118. The webs are rewound. The length of the strip is cut and joined together using an ultrasonic adhesive that connects them in a dot pattern from a grid of 4 mm diameter bonded spots, which are evenly spaced across the strip. Two grams of the skin cleansing and conditioning component selected from the conditioning components of Examples 22 to 26 are applied to the products on both sides at points using Table XY, a programmable controlled metering system including a heated tank maintained at 70 ° C, a pump, open-close valve, multi-pipette head and motor-driven XY coordinate control system for application head. The dots contain 0.1 g of conditioning component and have a diameter of 4 mm. The component on the product surface cools down quickly. The products are packaged and ready for use.

• fcfcfc fcfcfc fcfcfc fcfc fcfc fcfcfcfcfc fcfcfc fcfcfc fcfcfc

217

Examples 171 and 172

Exemplary skin cleansing and conditioning products are prepared with the surfactant powders of the Examples 3 and 4 as follows:

Four grams of dry surfactant powder are deposited on one side of a permeable, meltable web consisting of low temperature melt and heat-sealable fibers. The permeability band is Wonder Under manufactured by Pellon and available from H. Levinson &amp; Co., Chicago, IL, USA. The powder is evenly spread over an oval surface of approximately 17 cm x 19 cm. Polyester fleece layer with a basis weight of 2 oz / sg yd (67,8 g / m²) is cut to the same size as the web and placed above the fusible web. The polyester fleece has a basis weight of 2 oz / yd² (67.8 g / m²) and consists of a mixture of fibers with an average diameter of 23 µm and 40 µm (microns), at least a part of which is curled. The web thickness is 0.23 in (5.8 mm) measured at 5 gsi (0.78 g / cm)²). The fleece has an air permeability of about 1270 cfm / ft² (386 m³/min.m² and the critical pressure for the web is believed to be a second substrate layer, a foam permeability of 2.7 cm H₂The O. (0.1 MPa) heat-sealed adhesive, which is the laminate strip of Example 117, is cut to the same size as the hot melt strip. The second layer is located below the melting strip and the layers are joined together using point joints as well as a 2 mm wide joint around the perimeter with a heat-sealing head using a heat-sealing tool with a pressure plate such as Sentinel Model 808 Heat Welder available from Sencorp, Hyannis. , MA. Point joints measure about 3 mm in diameter, each of which has about 51 individual connection points that are evenly spaced. The product is · · 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 · 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

218 2.5 g of the skin conditioning component of Example 32 is sprayed on one side of the finished product and the mixture is applied as a hot liquid (50 ° C) to the product surface by pipette so that the coating is in the form of dots, each containing 0 , 1 g of the component and these points are located at some junction points. The component is rapidly cooled to the surface of the product and stored in a sealed metallized film package until use.

Example 173

An exemplary skin cleansing product is prepared as follows:

Four grams of the cleaning component of Example 11 are applied to one side of a low temperature, heat-sealable, sealable polyamide fiber weldable strip. The permeable band is Wonder Under, manufactured by pellon, available from H. Levinson &amp; Co., Chicago, II, USA. The cleaning component is applied to an oval area of ​​approximately 13 cm x 18 cm. The cleaning component is air dried. Polyester fleece layer with a basis weight of 2 oz / sq yd (67,8 g / m²) is cut to the same size as the web and placed on the fusible web. The polyester fleece has a basis weight of 2 oz / sq yd (67.8 g / m 2)²) and consists of a mixture of fibers with an average diameter of 23 µm and 40 µm (microns), at least a part of which is curled. The web thickness is 0.23 in (5.8 mm) measured at 5 gsi (0.78 g / cm)²). The fleece has an air permeability of about 1270 cfm / ft² (386 m³/min.m²) and critical pressure for • 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 44 4 4 4

219 foam permeability 2.7 cm H₂0. (0.1 MPa). It is believed that the web is heat-sealed without the use of glue. The laminate strip layer is according to Example 120. The shape of the article is oval 122 mm x 160 mm. The layers are joined together using dot joints in a grid pattern using a heat sealing head using a pressure plate heat welding device such as Sentinel type 808, available from Sencorp, Hyannis, MA. Each point joint measures about 4 mm in diameter and there are about 51 individual joint points that are evenly spaced. The product is cut and ready for use.

Examples 174-194

Exemplary skin cleansing and conditioning products are prepared using the skin conditioning ingredients of Examples 36 to 56 as follows.

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the first substrate by extruding it through the head continuously in four lines separated by 20 mm, 40 mm, and 20 mm pitches, measured to the width of the strip, creating a pair of parallel lines on each side of the strip. The cleaning component is extruded to an extent that yields 4.0 grams of cleaning component per finished product. The substrate is an air laid lightweight, low density polyester fiber web and has a basis weight of 100 g / m 2². The second substrate, the laminate strip of Example 118, is applied over the first substrate while contacting the cleaning component layer. The strips are fed continuously into an ultrasonic adhesive, which forms a lattice φ ♦ φ · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · φ

220 spot connections ο 4 mm in diameter, evenly spaced across the belt. The skin conditioning component is pumped from the hot container through the extrusion head with nozzles on both sides of the substrate belt at a rate equal to 3 g of the skin conditioning component per finished product (addition of 140 g / m 2)² on each side) at the points, each containing 0.2 g of conditioner and located at the joints. The belt then passes around a cooling fan so that the component cools down rapidly on the outer surfaces of the article. The cooling container is continuously stirred to maintain emulsion stability. The strip is cut into individual rectangular products measuring 120 mm x 160 mm with rounded corners.

Examples 195 to 197

Exemplary skin cleansing products are prepared with the liquid cleansing component of Examples 6, 9 and 10.

The liquid cleaning component is applied to one side of the first substrate with a brush until 2 grams of the cleaning component is applied in solidified form as window panes, omitting the edges and joints. The substrate is an air laid, lightweight, low density web consisting of a blend of 30% PET fiber with a fiber weight of 15 denier, 35% bicomponent fiber with a 3 denier fiber weight with a PET core and a PE sheath and 35% bicomponent fiber with a 10 denier fiber with the same core and shell composition having a basis weight of 100 g / m². The cleaning component is dried.

The second substrate is the laminate strip of Example 118 and is placed over the first substrate. The layers are joined together in a rectangular pattern as window panes using a heat-sealing head using a heat-sealing tool with a pressure plate such as Sentinel type 808, available from Sencorp, Hyannis, MA, USA.

9 9

9 9 99 ·· ·9 • 9 9 9

9*9« ·» 9· »9 99 9999

221 using sufficient temperature and pressure to form an adequate joint. The joint is continuous around the edges and has one transverse member

<td colspan="2">as in the window pane in</td><td colspan="2">direction X and Y width 2</td><td rowspan="2">mm. The product is</td>

<td>cut to size</td><td> 200</td><td>mm x 180</td><td>mm.</td>

<td>Examples 198-200</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Exemplary products</td><td>on</td><td>cleaning</td><td>skin with</td><td>folders on</td>

The skin conditioning according to Examples 60 to 62 is prepared as follows:

The liquid cleaning component of Example 10 is applied to one side of the first substrate with a brush until 2 grams of the cleaning component is applied in solid form as window panes, omitting edges and joints. The first substrate is an airlaid, lightweight, low density web consisting of a blend of 30% PET fiber with a fiber weight of 15 denier, 35% bicomponent fiber with a 3 denier fiber weight with a PET core and a PE sheath, and 35% bicomponent fiber with a fiber weight of 10 denier with the same core and shell composition having a basis weight of 100 g / m². The cleaning component is dried. The second substrate is the laminate strip of Example 119 and is placed over the first substrate. The layers are joined together in a rectangular pattern as window panes using a heat-sealing head using a heat-sealing tool with a pressure plate such as Sentinel type 808, available from Sencorp, Hyannis, MA, USA using sufficient temperature and pressure to form adequate connection. The joint is continuous around the edges and has one transverse member as in the X and Y window panes with a width of 2 mm. The article is cut and 1.5 grams of skin conditioning component is applied to the light web of the article by feeding the component through the slit

44 4·4 44 444 4 4 · 4 4 4444 444

44 44 *4 4* 4444

4 • 4 44

4 4 44

222 a roller device with a machined 1.5 mm gap and a storage tank is maintained at 60 ° C. The component cools down quickly on the surface of the product and is stored sealed in the metallized foil wrapper until use.

Example 201

Exemplary skin cleansing products with the skin conditioning ingredients of Example 11 and the laminate webs of Examples 119 and 124 are prepared as follows:

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the first substrate by extrusion through the head continuously in 4 lines separated by a 20 mm pitch, measured across the web. The cleaning component is extruded to a rate of 4.0 g of cleaning component per finished product. The substrate is an air laid, lightweight, low density web consisting of a blend of 30% PET fiber with a fiber weight of 15 denier, 35% bicomponent fiber with a 3 denier fiber weight with a PET core and a PE sheath and 35% bicomponent fiber with a 10 denier fiber with the same core and shell composition having a basis weight of 85 g / m². The second substrate web is the laminate web of Example 124 and is continuously applied over the first substrate and comes into contact with the surfactant-containing layer. The third substrate belt is the laminate belt of Example 118 and is continuously fed under the first substrate. The strips are continuously fed into an ultrasonic adhesive that is glued in a dot pattern that forms a grid of 4 mm diameter bonding points that are evenly spaced along the strip. The products are individually cut with rectangles of 120 mm x 160 mm with rounded corners and have different handles on both surfaces.

φ φ φ Φ Φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ «« «φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ φ

223

Example 102

Exemplary skin cleansing and conditioning products are prepared as follows:

Four grams of the skin conditioning component of Example 57 was applied one half on each side to the finished product of Example 173. The mixture was applied as a hot liquid (60-70 ° C) using a nozzle extruder to form two strips of coating 5 mm wide and 100 mm long, 2 cm apart on each side of the product.

Example 203

An exemplary skin cleansing and conditioning product is prepared as follows:

Three grams of the skin conditioning component of Examples 69-72 are applied, half on each side, to the finished product of Example 173. The component is uniformly applied to the product surfaces in a slot layer as a hot liquid (60-70 ° C), half of the component each side of the product.

Example 204

An exemplary skin cleansing product is prepared as follows:

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the first substrate by continuously extruding it through the head in four lines with a 20 mm pitch, measured across the web. The cleaning component is extruded to the extent that it yields 4.4 grams of the cleaning component per finished product. The first substrate is air laid, light,

<td></td><td> • 9 *9 • ♦ 9 • · 9 99</td><td> »* «9 • 9 9 9 9 * 99</td><td> 99 ·«- 9 9 9 9 * · 9</td>

<td></td><td> ·· 9·</td><td> 9 9 9«</td><td> 99 9999</td>

<td> 224</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>

<td>Low - density fleece, consisting of</td><td>30% PET</td><td>fiber</td><td>with</td>

<td>fiber weight 15 denier, 35%</td><td>bicomponent</td><td>fibers</td><td>with</td>

<td>A fiber weight of 3 deniers with a core of</td><td>PET and sheath</td><td>PE and 35</td><td>O. O</td>

bicomponent fiber with a denier of 10 denier with the same core and sheath composition and having a basis weight of 85 g / m². The second substrate is fed continuously over the first substrate and comes into contact with the layer containing the cleaning component. This second substrate is the same as the first substrate. The third substrate belt is a laminate belt of Example 119 and is continuously fed above the second substrate belt. The strips are continuously fed into an ultrasonic adhesive that is glued in a dot pattern that forms a grid of 4 mm diameter bonding points that are evenly spaced along the strip. The strip is cut into individual products, which are rectangles of 140 mm x 105 mm with rounded corners.

Example 205

An exemplary skin cleansing product is prepared as follows:

The cleaning component of Example 11 is applied to one side of the first substrate by extruding it through the head in four lines separated by a 20 mm pitch, measured across the web. The cleaning component is extruded to a rate of 4.0 g of cleaning component per finished product. The first substrate is an air laid, lightweight, low density resin bonded polyester fiber web available as Polystar AB1 from Libeltex, NV, Belgium. The substrate has a basis weight of 80 g / m². The second substrate is continuously fed above the first substrate while being placed in contact with the cleaning component-containing layer. This second substrate is a laminate strip of Example 119. The third substrate is laid continuously below the first substrate strip. The third substrate is also the laminate strip of Example 119. The strips are continuously fed into an ultrasonic adhesive that is bonded in a dot pattern that

4· 44 4« 4* »4 44 • « · · · · · · &gt; · 4

4 4 44 *44* &gt;4 4

44 444 44 444 · ·

4*44 »444 444 *4 ·4 4» 44 4444

225 they form a grid of 4 mm diameter connection points that are evenly spaced along the belt. The strip is cut into individual products, which are rectangles measuring 140 mm x 105 mm with rounded corners.

Example 206

An exemplary skin cleansing product is prepared as follows using the cleansing component of Example 11:

g of the cleaning components are spread onto the first substrate in a coarse oval of 5 cm x 8 cm. The substrate is a polyether foam available from General Foam having a thickness of 320 mil (8.1 mm). A piece of the second substrate, the laminate strip of Example 119, is placed above the first substrate. The substrates are joined together using an ultrasonic adhesive that is glued in a dot pattern that forms a grid of 4 mm diameter bonding points that are evenly spaced along the product. The substrate is cut into 140 mm x 105 mm rectangles with rounded corners.

Example 207

An exemplary skin cleansing and conditioning kit is prepared as follows:

An exemplary cleaning product according to Example 204 is prepared.

A skin conditioning product is prepared by applying the conditioning component of any one of Examples 22 to 89 to one first substrate by extruding it through the extrusion head continuously in four strips, each 5 mm wide, separated by 20 mm, 40 mm and 20 mm pitches measured in the direction across • * · • · ♦ 4 ····

226 forming a pair of parallel lines on each side of the belt. The ingredient is extruded at a rate of 3 grams of ingredient per finished product. The substrate is a braided blend of 70% rayon and 30% PET fibers, which are bonded with styrene-butadiene adhesive, which is subjected to hydro-treatment to form apertures of about 2 mm in diameter and having a basis weight of 70 g / m 2². The second sheet, which is an air laid lightweight, low density web, is continuously fed above the first substrate, and comes into contact with the first substrate on the side containing no skin conditioning components. The fleece comprises a blend of 30% PET fiber with a fiber weight of 15 deniers, 35% bicomponent fibers with a fiber weight of 3 deniers with a PET core and a PE sheath and 35% bicomponent fiber with a fiber weight of 10 denier with the same core and sheath composition. weight 100 g / m². The strips are continuously fed into an ultrasonic adhesive that is glued in a spot pattern that forms a grid of 4 mm diameter bonding points that are evenly spaced along the strip. The strip is cut into individual products, which are rectangles measuring 120 mm x 160 mm with rounded corners, which have 51 connection points per product.

The skin cleansing product and skin conditioning product are packaged together in a single package.

Example 208

An exemplary antibacterial hard surface cleaning product, e.g., a damp cloth having antibacterial properties, is prepared by saturating the laminate web of any one of Examples 117 to 124 with some of the cleaning ingredients listed in Examples 106 to 115. The components are preferably deposited on a web having a fill factor of about 3.2 to form pre-moistened • 44 4 444 4444 «44 · 4 4 4 ·· · 4 4 ·· ··· 44 444 4 4 • 444 4444» 44 ·· 44 44 44 ····

227 product in the form of a cloth. The resulting wipe-like products can then be packaged individually or in bulk.

Example 209

An exemplary antibacterial cleaning wet wipe for a hard surface is prepared by saturating the laminate web of any one of Examples 117 to 124 with any of the antibacterial cleaning ingredients of Examples 21 and 22. The resulting wiping products can then be packaged individually or in bulk.

Example 210

An exemplary conditioning product is prepared as follows:

The conditioning component of any one of Examples 22 to 89 is applied to one side of the laminate web of any one of Examples 117 to 124 by extruding an extrusion die to form points wherein each point contains 0.05 g of component and has a diameter about 3 mm. The ingredient is extruded to the extent that it yields 1.1 g of ingredient in the finished product. The second web is an air laid, lightweight, low density web which is continuously fed above the first substrate where it is placed in contact with the first substrate on the side that does not contain any skin conditioning component. The fleece comprises a blend of 10% PET fibers with a fiber weight of 15 derniers, 50% bicomponent fibers with a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) core and a polyethylene sheath with a fiber weight of 15 derniers and 40% bicomponent fibers of the same core composition and sheath with a fiber weight of 10 * · »··

9 9 9 9 9 9 » · * · • 9 999 9 9 99 9 9 9 • »9 · 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 4 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

99 99 99 99 9999

228 and has a basis weight of 80 g / m². The strips are continuously fed into an ultrasonic adhesive that is glued in a spot pattern that forms a grid of 4 mm diameter bonding points that are evenly spaced along the strip. The strip is cut into individual products, which are rectangles measuring 120 mm x 90 mm with rounded corners having 51 connection points per product. The product is suitable for application to small areas of the skin, such as the face, elbows, back or feet.

Example 211

An exemplary floor cleaning product is prepared as follows:

The laminate strip according to any one of Examples 117 to 124 is cut into a 100 x 130 mm pad. On the back of the sheet is added a polymeric barrier formed by Clopay film. Add 2 x 25 mm wide tie strips along the length of the pad to attach the pad to the tool. The Swifter ™ dust mop is trimmed to 100 x 130 mm (includes swivel head for wiping). A Velcro strap is adhered to this mop head to provide a cushion attachment. The mop head is saturated with one of the cleaning ingredients of Examples 92-105. The mop head is packaged such that the ingredients are not released prior to use by the consumer.

Example 212

An exemplary floor cleaning product is prepared as follows:

229 «9 99 ** ·· 99 9#

999 9 999 «999

9 999 9 9 99 9 9 9

99 ««9 99 999 9 9

9999 9999 99 «« 9 »99 99 9999

The laminate strip according to any one of Examples 117 to 124 is cut into a 100 x 130 mm pad. Add a Clopay polymer barrier to the back of the sheet. Add 2 x 25 mm wide tie strips along the length of the pad to attach the pad to the tool. The Swifter ™ dust mop is trimmed to 100 x 130 mm (includes swivel head for wiping). A Velcro strap is adhered to this mop head to provide a cushion attachment. Before attaching the pad to the mop head, the pad is filled with a polishing and dust-wiping component comprising a mixture of mineral and wax in wt. 1: 1 ratio. After filling the pad with the ingredient, the resulting product is packaged and remains so until use.

Example 213

An exemplary floor cleaning and dusting product is prepared as follows:

The laminate strip according to any one of Examples 117 to 124 is cut into a 100 x 130 mm pad. The pad is filled with a polishing and dust-wiping component comprising a mixture of meneral and wax in wt. 1: 1 ratio. After filling the pad with the ingredient, the resulting product is packaged and remains so until use.

Example 214

An exemplary fabric cleansing and recovery product is prepared as follows:

The laminate strip of any one of Examples 117 to 124 is cut into a 100 x 130 mm sheet. The sheet is filled with the cleaning ingredients according to the method of the invention. · · 9 ·· «&lt;

Β · · ······

230 examples of Α-Ε. After filling the sheet with the component, the resulting product is packaged and remains so until use.